Omron C200HW-PA204, C200HW-PD024 Installation Manual

Cat. No. W302-E1-09
Programmable Controllers
C200HX-CPUjj-E/-ZE
C200HG-CPUjj-E/-ZE
C200HE-CPUjj-E/-ZE
C200HX-CPUjj-E/-ZE
C200HG-CPUjj-E/-ZE
C200HE-CPUjj-E/-ZE
Programmable Controllers
Installation Guide
Revised June 2003
iv
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to the product.
!
DANGER
Indicates information that, if not heeded, is likely to result in loss of life or serious injury.
! WARNING
Indicates information that, if not heeded, could possibly result in loss of life or serious injury.
! Caution
Indicates information that, if not heeded, could result in relatively serious or minor injury, damage to the product, or faulty operation.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers
to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PC” means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for anything else.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation
of the product.
1, 2, 3...
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
 OMRON Electronics LLC 1996-2003
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any
form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is
constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change
without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no
responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
v
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-2
1-3
What is a Control System? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Role of the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Does a PC Work? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 2
System Configuration and Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
Basic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expanded System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 3
Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3-2
Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 4
Programming Console Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4-2
Using the Programming Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Initial Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 5
Troubleshooting, Inspections, and Maintenance . . . . . . .
5-1
5-2
5-3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
xii
xii
xii
xiii
xiv
xv
1
2
4
5
9
10
14
31
33
49
50
63
79
80
82
83
84
87
92
Appendices
A
B
C
D
Standard Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit Current and Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Mounting Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
95
113
213
219
229
233
237
vii
About this Manual:
This manual describes the installation of C200HX, C200HG, and C200HE Programmable Controllers,
and it includes the sections described below. Programming and operating information is provided in the
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE Operation Manual.
Please read this manual completely and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to install a C200HX/C200HG/C200HE PC. Be sure to read the precautions in the following section.
Section 1 is an introduction to Programmable Controllers (or PCs). General information is provided on
PCs and how they work.
Section 2 provides a description of all the components of the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE. The names of
the parts of each Unit are given. Expanded systems, including networks and Special I/O Units are also
introduced.
Section 3 describes how to install and wire a PC System.
Section 4 provides general information about the Programming Console.
Section 5 provides information on hardware and software errors that occur during PC operation. It also
covers maintenance and inspection, and explains how to replace consumable components such as
fuses, relays, and batteries.
Appendix A provides tables of standard models.
Appendix B provides tables of Unit specifications.
Appendix C provides the current/power consumptions for the Units and calculations of the total consumption of a PC.
Appendix D provides Unit dimensions and mounting information.
A Glossary, and an Index are also provided.
! WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in
personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each
section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section
and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
ix
Certain Terms and Conditions of Sale
1. Offer; Acceptance. These terms and conditions (these "Terms") are deemed
part of all catalogs, manuals or other documents, whether electronic or in writing, relating to the sale of goods or services (collectively, the "Goods") by
Omron Electronics LLC and its subsidiary companies ("Seller"). Seller hereby
objects to any terms or conditions proposed in Buyer's purchase order or other
documents which are inconsistent with, or in addition to, these Terms. Please
contact your Omron representative to confirm any additional terms for sales
from your Omron company.
2. Prices. All prices stated are current, subject to change without notice by
Seller. Buyer agrees to pay the price in effect at time of shipment.
3. Discounts. Cash discounts, if any, will apply only on the net amount of
invoices sent to Buyer after deducting transportation charges, taxes and
duties, and will be allowed only if (i) the invoice is paid according to Seller's
payment terms and (ii) Buyer has no past due amounts owing to Seller.
4. Orders. Seller will accept no order less than $200 net billing.
5. Governmental Approvals. Buyer shall be responsible for, and shall bear all
costs involved in, obtaining any government approvals required for the importation or sale of the Goods.
6. Taxes. All taxes, duties and other governmental charges (other than general
real property and income taxes), including any interest or penalties thereon,
imposed directly or indirectly on Seller or required to be collected directly or
indirectly by Seller for the manufacture, production, sale, delivery, importation,
consumption or use of the Goods sold hereunder (including customs duties
and sales, excise, use, turnover and license taxes) shall be charged to and
remitted by Buyer to Seller.
7. Financial. If the financial position of Buyer at any time becomes unsatisfactory
to Seller, Seller reserves the right to stop shipments or require satisfactory
security or payment in advance. If Buyer fails to make payment or otherwise
comply with these Terms or any related agreement, Seller may (without liability
and in addition to other remedies) cancel any unshipped portion of Goods sold
hereunder and stop any Goods in transit until Buyer pays all amounts, including amounts payable hereunder, whether or not then due, which are owing to it
by Buyer. Buyer shall in any event remain liable for all unpaid accounts.
8. Cancellation; Etc. Orders are not subject to rescheduling or cancellation
unless Buyer indemnifies Seller fully against all costs or expenses arising in
connection therewith.
9. Force Majeure. Seller shall not be liable for any delay or failure in delivery
resulting from causes beyond its control, including earthquakes, fires, floods,
strikes or other labor disputes, shortage of labor or materials, accidents to
machinery, acts of sabotage, riots, delay in or lack of transportation or the
requirements of any government authority.
10. Shipping; Delivery. Unless otherwise expressly agreed in writing by Seller:
a. Shipments shall be by a carrier selected by Seller;
b. Such carrier shall act as the agent of Buyer and delivery to such carrier
shall constitute delivery to Buyer;
c. All sales and shipments of Goods shall be FOB shipping point (unless otherwise stated in writing by Seller), at which point title to and all risk of loss of
the Goods shall pass from Seller to Buyer, provided that Seller shall retain a
security interest in the Goods until the full purchase price is paid by Buyer;
d. Delivery and shipping dates are estimates only.
e. Seller will package Goods as it deems proper for protection against normal
handling and extra charges apply to special conditions.
11. Claims. Any claim by Buyer against Seller for shortage or damage to the
Goods occurring before delivery to the carrier must be presented in writing to
Seller within 30 days of receipt of shipment and include the original transportation bill signed by the carrier noting that the carrier received the Goods from
Seller in the condition claimed.
12. Warranties. (a) Exclusive Warranty. Seller's exclusive warranty is that the
Goods will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of
twelve months from the date of sale by Seller (or such other period expressed
in writing by Seller). Seller disclaims all other warranties, express or implied.
(b) Limitations. SELLER MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ABOUT NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE GOODS.
BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE
GOODS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. Seller further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of
any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Goods or otherwise of any intellectual property right. (c) Buyer Remedy. Seller's sole obligation hereunder shall be to replace (in the form originally shipped with Buyer
responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof) the noncomplying Good or, at Seller's election, to repay or credit Buyer an amount
equal to the purchase price of the Good; provided that in no event shall Seller
be responsible for warranty, repair, indemnity or any other claims or expenses
regarding the Goods unless Seller's analysis confirms that the Goods were
properly handled, stored, installed and maintained and not subject to contamination, abuse, misuse or inappropriate modification. Return of any goods by
Buyer must be approved in writing by Seller before shipment. Seller shall not
be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Goods
in combination with any electrical or electronic components, circuits, system
assemblies or any other materials or substances or environments. Any
advice, recommendations or information given orally or in writing, are not to be
construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty.
13. Damage Limits; Etc. SELLER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE
GOODS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY,
NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY. Further, in no event shall liability of
Seller exceed the individual price of the Good on which liability is asserted.
14. Indemnities. Buyer shall indemnify and hold harmless Seller, its affiliates and
its employees from and against all liabilities, losses, claims, costs and
expenses (including attorney's fees and expenses) related to any claim, investigation, litigation or proceeding (whether or not Seller is a party) which arises
or is alleged to arise from Buyer's acts or omissions under these Terms or in
any way with respect to the Goods. Without limiting the foregoing, Buyer (at
its own expense) shall indemnify and hold harmless Seller and defend or settle
any action brought against Seller to the extent that it is based on a claim that
any Good made to Buyer specifications infringed intellectual property rights of
another party.
15. Property; Confidentiality. The intellectual property embodied in the Goods is
the exclusive property of Seller and its affiliates and Buyer shall not attempt to
duplicate it in any way without the written permission of Seller. Notwithstanding any charges to Buyer for engineering or tooling, all engineering and tooling
shall remain the exclusive property of Seller. All information and materials
supplied by Seller to Buyer relating to the Goods are confidential and proprietary, and Buyer shall limit distribution thereof to its trusted employees and
strictly prevent disclosure to any third party.
16. Miscellaneous. (a) Waiver. No failure or delay by Seller in exercising any right
and no course of dealing between Buyer and Seller shall operate as a waiver
of rights by Seller. (b) Assignment. Buyer may not assign its rights hereunder
without Seller's written consent. (c) Amendment. These Terms constitute the
entire agreement between Buyer and Seller relating to the Goods, and no provision may be changed or waived unless in writing signed by the parties.
(d) Severability. If any provision hereof is rendered ineffective or invalid, such
provision shall not invalidate any other provision. (e) Setoff. Buyer shall have
no right to set off any amounts against the amount owing in respect of this
invoice. (f) As used herein, "including" means "including without limitation".
Certain Precautions on Specifications and Use
1. Suitability of Use. Seller shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes or regulations which apply to the combination of the Good in the
Buyer's application or use of the Good. At Buyer's request, Seller will provide
applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations
of use which apply to the Good. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the Good in combination with the
end product, machine, system, or other application or use. The following are
some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given.
This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of this Good,
nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for this Good:
(i) Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical
interference, or conditions or uses not described in this document.
(ii) Energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation
systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety
equipment, and installations subject to separate industry or government
regulations.
(iii) Systems, machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or
property. Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to
this Good.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS
RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM
AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT
THE SELLER'S PRODUCT IS PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR
THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
2. Programmable Products. Seller shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable Good, or any consequence thereof.
3. Performance Data. Performance data given in this catalog is provided as a
guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty.
It may represent the result of Seller's test conditions, and the user must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the
Seller's Warranty and Limitations of Liability.
4. Change in Specifications. Product specifications and accessories may be
changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons. It is our practice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed,
or when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the Good may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special
part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your
application. Please consult with your Seller's representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased Good.
5. Errors and Omissions. The information in this catalog has been carefully
checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed
for clerical, typographical or proofreading errors, or omissions.
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Controller (PC) and related devices.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the PC. You must read
this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a PC system.
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
xii
xii
xiii
xiv
xv
xi
5
Safety Precautions
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications
described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual
or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation
systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement
machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that
may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the
systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating OMRON PCs.
Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the software and keep this
manual close at hand for reference during operation.
! WARNING It is extremely important that a PC and all PC Units be used for the specified
purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that can
directly or indirectly affect human life.
3
Safety Precautions
! WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied. Doing so
may result in electric shock.
! WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being
supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.
! WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do so
may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.
! WARNING Do not touch the Power Supply Unit while power is being supplied or
immediately after power has been turned OFF. Doing so may result in electric
shock.
! WARNING Provide safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable
Controller), including the following items, to ensure safety in the system if an
abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PC or another external factor
affecting the PC operation. Not doing so may result in serious accidents.
xii
Operating Environment Precautions
4
• Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety
measures must be provided in external control circuits.
• The PC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects any
error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed. As a countermeasure for such errors, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system.
• The PC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of the
output relays or destruction of the output transistors. As a countermeasure for
such problems, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in
the system.
• When the 24-VDC output (service power supply to the PC) is overloaded or
short-circuited, the voltage may drop and result in the outputs being turned
OFF. As a countermeasure for such problems, external safety measures must
be provided to ensure safety in the system.
4
! Caution
Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be caused
by extending the cycle time. Otherwise, the input signals may not be readable.
! Caution
Confirm safety at the destination node before transferring a program to another
node or changing contents of the I/O memory area. Doing either of these without
confirming safety may result in injury.
! Caution
Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to the
torque specified in the operation manual. The loose screws may result in burning
or malfunction.
! Caution
When using the C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit with an 8-slot or 10-slot
CPU Backplane or Expansion I/O Backplane, be sure to use only Backplanes
with “-V1” at the end of the model number. Using an 8-slot or 10-slot Backplane
without “-V1” at the end of the model number may result in malfunction due to
deterioration of the base or pattern burnout. The 3-slot and 5-slot Backplanes do
not come in “-V1” models, and models without “-V1” can be used.
Operating Environment Precautions
! Caution
Do not operate the control system in the following locations:
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in
the specifications.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.
! Caution
Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the
following locations:
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
xiii
5
Application Precautions
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power supplies.
! Caution
5
The operating environment of the PC system can have a large effect on the longevity and reliability of the system. Improper operating environments can lead to
malfunction, failure, and other unforeseeable problems with the PC system. Be
sure that the operating environment is within the specified conditions at installation and remains within the specified conditions during the life of the system.
Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the PC system.
! WARNING Always heed these precautions. Failure to abide by the following precautions
could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury.
• Always ground the system to 100 Ω or less when installing the Units. Not connecting to a ground of 100 Ω or less may result in electric shock.
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the PC before attempting any of the following. Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction or electric
shock.
• Mounting or dismounting I/O Units, CPU Units, Memory Cassettes, Power
Supply Units, or any other Units.
• Assembling the Units.
• Setting DIP switches or rotary switches.
• Connecting cables or wiring the system.
• Connecting or disconnecting the connectors.
! Caution
Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of the
PC or the system, or could damage the PC or PC Units. Always heed these precautions.
• Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines,
momentary power interruptions, or other causes.
• Always use the power supply voltages specified in this manual. An incorrect
voltage may result in malfunction or burning.
• Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the rated
voltage and frequency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places where the
power supply is unstable. An incorrect power supply may result in malfunction.
• Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in external wiring. Insufficient safety measures against short-circuiting may
result in burning.
• Do not apply voltages to the Input Units in excess of the rated input voltage.
Excess voltages may result in burning.
• Do not apply voltages or connect loads to the Output Units in excess of the
maximum switching capacity. Excess voltage or loads may result in burning.
• Disconnect the functional ground terminal when performing withstand voltage
tests. Not disconnecting the functional ground terminal may result in burning.
• Be sure that all the mounting screws, terminal screws, and cable connector
screws are tightened to the torque specified in this manual. Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction.
xiv
6
Conformance to EC Directives
• Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring. Removing the label may result in malfunction if foreign matter enters the Unit.
• Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipation. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.
• Double-check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power supply. Incorrect wiring may result in burning.
• Wire correctly. Incorrect wiring may result in burning.
• Mount Units only after checking terminal blocks and connectors completely.
• Be sure that the terminal blocks, Memory Units, expansion cables, and other
items with locking devices are properly locked into place. Improper locking
may result in malfunction.
• Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on the
Unit. Not checking the program may result in an unexpected operation.
• Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of
the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Changing the operating mode of the PC.
• Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.
• Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.
• Resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit the contents of
the DM Area, HR Area, and other data required for resuming operation. Not
doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Do not pull on the cables or bend the cables beyond their natural limit. Doing
either of these may break the cables.
• Do not place objects on top of the cables or other wiring lines. Doing so may
break the cables.
• Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to
terminals. Connection of bare stranded wires may result in burning.
• When replacing parts, be sure to confirm that the rating of a new part is correct.
Not doing so may result in malfunction or burning.
• Before touching a Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in order
to discharge any static built-up. Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage.
6
Conformance to EC Directives
Observe the following precautions when installing the C200HX/HG/HE PCs that
conform to the EC Directives.
1, 2, 3...
1. Since the C200HX/HG/HE PC is defined as an open type, be sure to install it
inside a panel.
2. Provide reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power source
connected to the DC I/O Unit and for a CPU Unit with a DC Power Supply
Unit.
3. The C200HX/HG/HE PC that conforms to the EC Directives also conforms,
as an individual unit, to the Common Emission Standard (EN50081-2) of the
EC Directives. When incorporated into a device, however, the C200HX/HG/
HE PC may not satisfy this Standard due to the noise produced by the contact output when it switches on and off. In such a case, it will be necessary to
take countermeasures such as connecting a surge or arc killer, or providing
an external means of protection for the PC. The countermeasures taken to
satisfy the Standard vary depending on the load devices, wiring, machinery
configuration, etc. Described on page 137 are examples of countermeasures to be taken to reduce the noise.
xv
Conformance to EC Directives
6
Criteria for Taking Countermeasures
(Refer to EN50081-2 for details.)
Countermeasures are not required if the frequency of load switching for the
whole system with the PC included is less than 5 times per minute.
Countermeasures are not required if the frequency of load switching for the
whole system with the PC included is more than 5 times per minute.
xvi
SECTION 1
Introduction
This section provides general information about Programmable Controllers (PCs) and how they fit into a Control System.
1-1
1-2
1-3
What is a Control System? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Role of the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-1 Input Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-2 Output Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Does a PC Work? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
4
4
4
5
1
Section 1-1
What is a Control System?
1-1
What is a Control System?
A Control System is the electronic equipment needed to control a particular process. It may include everything from a process control computer, if one is used,
to the factory computer, down through the PCs (and there may be many of them
networked together) and then on down through the network to the control components: the switches, stepping motors, solenoids, and sensors which monitor
and control the mechanical operations.
Process Control Computer
Factory Computer
PCs
PC
PC
PC
Control Components
A Control System can involve very large applications where many different models of PC are networked together or it could be an application as small as a single
PC controlling a single output device.
2
Section 1-1
What is a Control System?
A Position Control System
Position Control Unit
Input Unit
PC
Signal line for
Servomotor
driver control
Power
source
Hand-held Programming
Console
Control panel
Control switch
DC Servomotor
Driver
Power
source
DC Servomotor
DC Servomotor Driver
DC Servomotor
In the typical Control System example shown above, a PC controls the movement of the workpiece bed across two horizontal axes using Limit Switches and
Servomotors to monitor and control movement.
3
Section 1-2
The Role of the PC
1-2
The Role of the PC
The Programmable Controller, or PC, is the part of the Control System that
directly controls the manufacturing process. According to the program stored in
its memory, the PC accepts data from the input devices connected to it, and uses
this data to monitor the controlled system. When the program calls for some
action to take place, the PC sends data to the output devices connected to it, to
cause that action to take place. The PC may be used to control a simple, repetitive task, or it may be connected to other PCs, or to a host computer in order to
integrate the control of a complex process.
1-2-1 Input Devices
PCs can receive input from either automated or manual devices. The PC could
receive data from the user via a pushbutton switch, keyboard, or similar device.
Automated input could come from a variety of devices: microswitches, timers,
encoders, photosensors, and so on. Some devices, like the Limit Switch shown
below, turn ON or OFF when the equipment actually makes contact with it. Other
devices, like the Photoelectric Switch and Proximity Switch shown below, use
other means, such as light or inductance, in order to get information about the
equipment being monitored.
Photoelectric switch
Limit switch
Proximity switch
1-2-2 Output Devices
A PC can output to a myriad of devices for use in automated control. Almost anything that you can think of could be controlled (perhaps indirectly) by a PC. Some
of the most common devices are motors, Solenoids, Servomotors, Stepping
Motors, valves, switches, indicator lights, buzzers, and alarms. Some of these
output devices; such as the motors, Solenoids, Servomotors, Stepping Motors,
4
Section 1-3
How Does a PC Work?
and valves; affect the controlled system directly. Others; such as the indicator
lights, buzzers, and alarms; provide output to notify personnel.
Solenoid
Servomotor
Stepping motor
1-3
How Does a PC Work?
PCs operate by monitoring input signals and providing output signals. When
changes are detected in the signals, the PC reacts, through the user-programmed internal logic, to produce output signals. The PC continually scans the
program in its memory to achieve this control.
Block Diagram of PC
Power Supply
Memory
Signals
from
switches,
sensors,
etc.
Input
CPU
Output
Signals to
Solenoids,
motors,
etc.
Programming
Device
A program for your applications must be designed, and stored in the PC. This
program is then executed as part of the cycle of internal operations of the PC.
5
How Does a PC Work?
Cycle
When a PC operates, that is, when it executes its program to control an external
system, a series of operations are performed inside the PC. These internal
operations can be broadly classified into the following four categories:
1, 2, 3...
Cycle Time
6
Section 1-3
1. Common (or overseeing) processes, such as watchdog timer operation and
testing the program memory.
2. Data input and output.
3. Instruction execution.
4. Peripheral device servicing.
The total time required for a PC to perform all these internal operations is called
the cycle time. The flowchart and diagram on the following page illustrate these
internal operations for a typical PC.
Timing is one of the most important factors in designing a Control System. For
accurate operations, it is necessary to have answers to such questions as these:
• How long does it take for the PC to execute all the instructions in its memory?
• How long does it take for the PC to produce a control output in response to a
given input signal?
The cycle time of the PC can be automatically calculated and monitored, but it is
necessary to have an understanding of the timing relationships within the PC for
effective system design and programming.
Section 1-3
How Does a PC Work?
Flowchart of CPU Operation
Power application
Clears IR area and
resets all timers
Initialization on
power-up
Checks I/O Unit connections
Resets watchdog timer
Checks hardware and
Program Memory
Overseeing
processes
NO
Check OK?
YES
Resets watchdog timer and
program address counter
Sets error flags and turns
ON or flashes indicator
ALARM/ERROR
ERROR
(Solid ON)
Program
execution
Executes program
ALARM
(Flashing)
End of program?
NO
YES
SCAN(18)
executed?
NO
YES
Resets watchdog timer and waits
until the set cycle time has elapsed
Cycle time
calculation
PC
cycle
time
Calculates cycle time
Resets watchdog timer
I/O refreshing
Refreshes input bits
and output signals
Services RS-232C
connector
RS-232C
connector
servicing
Services Host Link Units
Host Link Unit
servicing
Services Peripheral devices
Peripheral
device
servicing
Services Communications
Boards
Communications
Board servicing
Services SYSMAC LINK and
SYSMAC NET Link Units
SYSMAC LINK
and SYSMAC
NET servicing
7
SECTION 2
System Configuration and Units
This section describes the system configuration used for the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE PCs and the individual Units used in
the system configuration.
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
Basic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-1 CPU Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-2 Expansion I/O Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-3 I/O Connecting Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-1 CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-2 Memory Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-3 Communications Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-4 Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-5 Backplanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-6 Standard I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-7 Group-2 High-density I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-8 High-density I/O Units Classified as Special I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-1 Programming Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-2 CX-Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expanded System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-1 Required Mounting Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-2 Special I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-3 Link Systems and Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
10
13
14
14
14
17
18
19
24
25
27
30
31
31
32
33
33
33
40
9
Section 2-1
Basic Configuration
2-1
Basic Configuration
The basic configuration of the PC is shown below. With the C200HX/
C200HG/C200HE, up to two or up to three Expansion I/O Racks (depending on
the CPU Unit) can be connected to the CPU Rack, depending on the number of
I/O points required in the system.
CPU Rack
I/O Connecting Cables
Expansion I/O Racks
2-1-1 CPU Rack
An example of a CPU Rack is shown below. The CPU Rack consists of a CPU
Backplane, CPU Unit, Power Supply Unit, I/O Units, and other special Units.
CPU Unit
Power Supply Unit
CPU Backplane
Other Units
10
Section 2-1
Basic Configuration
Power Supply Units
The Power Supply Unit supplies power to the CPU Rack. The Power Supply
Units listed in the following table are available. Refer to 2-2-4 Power Supply
Units for further details.
Model
Supply voltage
100 to 120 VAC,,
200 to 240 VAC
C200HW-PA204
C200HW-PA204S
C200HW-PA204R/PA209R
(See note.)
C200HW-PD024
24 VDC
Remarks
--Provides 24-VDC output
terminals.
Equipped with RUN output
contacts.
---
Note The C200HW-PA204R/PA209R cannot be used with all combinations of CPU
Units and Backplanes. Refer to page 23, Restrictions for the C200HW-PA204R/
PA209R, for details.
CPU Units
Model
The CPU Units listed in the following tables are available. Refer to 2-2-1 CPU
Units for further details on the CPU Units.
User
program
memory
Data
memory
Extended
data memory
(EM)
C200HE-CPU11-E/ZE
3.2K words
4K words
---
Instruction
processing
time (basic
instructions)
0.3 µs min.
Max. real I/O
points
supported
Max. No. of
Expansion
I/O Racks
640 points
2 Racks
C200HE-CPU32-E/ZE
7.2K words
6K words
---
0.3 µs min.
880 points
2 Racks
C200HE-CPU42-E/ZE
7.2K words
6K words
---
0.3 µs min.
880 points
2 Racks
C200HG-CPU33-E/ZE
15.2K words
6K words
6K words
0.15 µs min.
880 points
2 Racks
C200HG-CPU43-E/ZE
15.2K words
6K words
6K words
0.15 µs min.
880 points
2 Racks
C200HG-CPU53-E/ZE
15.2K words
6K words
6K words
0.15 µs min.
1,184 points
3 Racks
C200HG-CPU63-E/ZE
15.2K words
6K words
6K words
0.15 µs min.
1,184 points
3 Racks
C200HX-CPU34-E/ZE
31.2K words
6K words
0.1 µs min.
880 points
2 Racks
C200HX-CPU44-E/ZE
31.2K words
6K words
0.1 µs min.
880 points
2 Racks
C200HX-CPU54-E/ZE
31.2K words
6K words
0.1 µs min.
1,184 points
3 Racks
C200HX-CPU64-E/ZE
31.2K words
6K words
0.1 µs min.
1,184 points
3 Racks
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
63.2K words
6K words
0.1 µs min.
1,184 points
3 Racks
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
63.2K words
6K words
6K words x 3
(18K words)
6K words x 3
(18K words)
6K words x 3
(18K words)
6K words x 3
(18K words)
6K words x 8
(48K words)
6K words x 16
(96K words)
0.1 µs min.
1,184 points
3 Racks
11
Section 2-1
Basic Configuration
Model
Max. No. of Group-2
High-density I/O Units
Max. No. of
Special
Spec
a I/O
/O
i
Units
(see note 2)
RS-232C
Clock
((RTC)
C)
Communications
Board
oa d
C200HE-CPU11-E/ZE
Not supported
64-point Units
(see note 1)
Not supported 10 Units
No
No
No
C200HE-CPU32-E/ZE
10 Units
5 Units
10 Units
No
Yes
Yes
C200HE-CPU42-E/ZE
10 Units
5 Units
10 Units
Yes
Yes
Yes
C200HG-CPU33-E/ZE
10 Units
5 Units
10 Units
No
Yes
Yes
C200HG-CPU43-E/ZE
10 Units
5 Units
10 Units
Yes
Yes
Yes
C200HG-CPU53-E/ZE
16 Units
8 Units
16 Units
No
Yes
Yes
C200HG-CPU63-E/ZE
16 Units
8 Units
16 Units
Yes
Yes
Yes
C200HX-CPU34-E/ZE
10 Units
5 Units
10 Units
No
Yes
Yes
C200HX-CPU44-E/ZE
10 Units
5 Units
10 Units
Yes
Yes
Yes
C200HX-CPU54-E/ZE
16 Units
8 Units
16 Units
No
Yes
Yes
C200HX-CPU64-E/ZE
16 Units
8 Units
16 Units
Yes
Yes
Yes
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
16 Units
8 Units
16 Units
Yes
Yes
Yes
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
16 Units
8 Units
16 Units
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note
CPU Backplane
1. Each 64 I/O Unit is treated as two Units.
2. Special I/O Units like the C200H-NC211 that are allocated the words for two
Units are treated as two Units.
3. Unit number settings for Group-2 Units for the following CPU Units must be
between 0 and 9:
C200HE-CPU32/42-E/ZE
C200HG-CPU33/43-E/ZE
C200HX-CPU34/44-E/ZE
The CPU Backplane is required to mount the CPU Unit and other Units composing the CPU Rack. The following CPU Backplanes are available depending on
the number of slot required for Units. Refer to 2-2-5 Backplanes for further
details.
Model
Number of slots
C200HW-BC031
3
C200HW-BC051
5
C200HW-BC081-V1
8
C200HW-BC101-V1
10
Note When using the C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit with an 8-slot or 10-slot
CPU Backplane or Expansion I/O Backplane, be sure to use the C200HWBC081-V1 or C200HW-BC101-V1.
Other Units
12
The other Units that can be mounted to the CPU Rack include the Standard I/O
Units, High-density I/O Units, and Special I/O Units.
Section 2-1
Basic Configuration
2-1-2 Expansion I/O Racks
An example of an Expansion I/O Rack is shown in the following diagram. Expansion I/O Racks consist of and I/O Backplane, Power Supply Unit, I/O Units, and
other Units. Expansion I/O Racks are connected to the CPU Rack to increase
the number of I/O Units and other Units that can be used by the PC. You can
connect up to 2 or up to 3 Expansion I/O Racks to a CPU Rack, the number
depending on the CPU Unit that is used.
Power Supply Unit
I/O Backplane
Other Units
Power Supply Unit
The Power Supply Unit supplies power to the Expansion I/O Rack. The Power
Supply Units listed in the following table are available. Refer to 2-2-4 Power Supply Units for further details.
C200HW-PA204
C200HW-PA204S
Model
Supply voltage
100 to 120 VAC,,
200 to 240 VAC
C200HW-PD204R
C200HW-PD209R
C200HW-PD024
24 VDC
Remarks
--Provides 24-VDC output
terminals.
Equipped
q pp with RUN
output contacts.
Note RUN output contacts cannot be used with Expansion I/O Racks.
I/O Backplane
The I/O Backplane is required to mount the Power Supply Unit and other Units
composing the Expansion I/O Rack. The following I/O Backplanes are available
depending on the number of slot required for Units. Refer to 2-2-5 Backplanes
for further details.
Model
Number of slots
C200HW-BI031
3
C200HW-BI051
5
C200HW-BI081-V1
8
C200HW-BI101-V1
10
Note When using the C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit with an 8 or 10-slot Backplane, be sure to use the C200HW-BC081-V1 or C200HW-BC101-V1.
Other Units
The other Units that can be mounted to an Expansion I/O Rack include the Standard I/O Units, High-density I/O Units, and Special I/O Units.
13
Units
Section 2-2
2-1-3 I/O Connecting Cable
The first Expansion I/O Rack is connected to the CPU Rack, and the second and
third Expansion I/O Racks are connected to the previous Expansion I/O Rack
through I/O Connecting Cable. There are five different lengths of cable available, which can be used as desired to provide the desired distance between
each Rack. The sum of the lengths of all the I/O Connecting Cables connected
within one PC, however, but be 12 m or less.
Model
2-2
Cable length
C200H-CN311
30 cm
C200H-CN711
70 cm
C200H-CN221
2m
C200H-CN521
5m
C200H-CN131
10 m
Units
2-2-1 CPU Units
The following diagram shows the components of the CPU Unit as viewed from
the front cover. The numbers in the diagram correspond to the numbers of the
following items in the description.
1. Indicators
2. Memory Casette
compartment
3. DIP Switch
6. Communications Board
compartment
4. Peripheral port
5. RS-232C port
14
Units
Section 2-2
1, 2, 3...
1. Indicators
The indicators (LEDs) on the front cover of the CPU Unit operate as
described in the following table.
LED
RUN (green)
ERR (red)
Contents
Lights when the PC is operating normally in MONITOR
or RUN mode.
Flashes if an error occurs that does not stop the CPU
Unit (a non-fatal error).
Lights if an error occurs that stops the CPU Unit (a fatal
error). If a fatal error occurs, the RUN indicator will turn
OFF and the outputs from all Output Units will turn OFF.
INH (orange)
Lights when the Load OFF Bit (SR 25215) turns ON. If
the Load OFF Bit is turned ON, the outputs from all
Output Units will turn OFF.
COMM (orange)
Lights when the CPU Unit is communicating via the
peripheral or RS-232C port.
2. Memory Casette Compartment
The Memory Cassette compartment contains the built-in RAM and can be
used to mount an optional Memory Cassette. Refer to 3-1-8 Mounting
Memory Cassettes for the mounting methods.
15
Units
Section 2-2
3. DIP Switch
The DIP switch is used to make various settings that determine who the PC
will operate. The C200HX/C200HG/C200HE CPU Unit has a 6-pin DIP
switch, as shown in the following diagram. The settings of these pins are
listed in the following table.
Pin no.
1
2
3
4
5
Setting
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Function
Writing disabled for user memory.
Writing enabled for user memory.
Contents of the Memory Cassette automatically read when power is turned on.
Contents of the Memory Cassette not automatically read when power is turned on.
Programming Console messages displayed in English.
Programming Console messages displayed in the language stored in system ROM. (Messages
displayed in Japanese with the Japanese version of system ROM.)
Setting function for special instructions enabled.
Setting function for special instructions disabled (default).
Standard communications parameters (see note) will be set for the following serial communications
ports.
• Built-in RS-232C port
• Peripheral port (only when a CQM1-CIF01/-CIF02 Cable is connected. Does not apply to Programming Console.)
Note
1. Standard communications parameters are as follows:
Serial communications mode: Host Link or peripheral bus; start bits: 1; data length: 7 bits;
parity: even; stop bits: 2; baud rate: 9,600 bps
2. The CX-Programmer running on a personal computer can be connected to the peripheral
port via the peripheral bus using the above standard communications parameters.
OFF
6
ON
OFF
The communications parameters for the following serial communications ports will be set in PC
Setup as follows:
• Built-in RS-232C port: DM 6645 and DM 6646
• Peripheral port: DM 6650 and DM 6651
Note When the CX-Programmer is connected to the peripheral port with the peripheral bus, either set
bits 00 to 03 of DM 6650 to 0 Hex (for standard parameters), or set bits 12 to 15 of DM 6650 to 0
Hex and bits 00 to 03 of DM 6650 to 1 Hex (for Host Link or peripheral bus) separately.
Expansion TERMINAL mode for the Programming Console; AR 0712: ON
Console mode for the Programming Console; AR 0712: OFF
Note All pins are set to OFF for the factory defaults.
4. Peripheral Port
The peripheral port is connected to peripheral devices, such as the Programming Console.
5. RS-232C Port
The RS-232C port is connected to external devices that support an
RS-232C interface, such as personal computers.
6. Communications Board Compartment
The Communications Board compartment is used to mount a Communica-
16
Units
Section 2-2
tions Board. Refer to 3-1-9 Mounting a Communications Board for the
mounting methods.
2-2-2 Memory Cassettes
Memory Cassettes can be optionally mounted to increase memory capacity
over just the built-in RAM. There are two types of Memory Cassette available.
These are shown in the following diagram.
EEPROM Memory Cassette
EPROM Memory Cassette
Notch
C200HW-ME
EEPROM Memory Cassette
When an EEPROM Memory Cassette is installed in the CPU Unit, the user
memory (UM) and I/O data can be directly read and written. There is no need for
a backup power supply. The Memory Cassette can also be removed from the
CPU Unit and used for storing data.
Model
Capacity
C200HW-ME04K
4K words
C200HW-ME08K
8K words
C200HW-ME16K
16K words
C200HW-ME32K
32K words
C200HW-ME64K
64K words
Note The C200HW-ME64K can be used with the C200HX-CPU65-ZE/CPU85-ZE
CPU Units only. It cannot be used with other CPU Units.
EPROM Memory Cassette
With an EPROM Memory Cassette, the program is written using a PROM Writer.
The ROM is mounted to the Memory Casette and then installed in the CPU Unit.
I/O data cannot be stored.
Model
Capacity
C200HS-MP16K
16K words/32K words
Memory Cassette Settings
EEPROM Memory Cassette
Set the DIP switch. For an EEPROM Memory Cassette, set pin no. 1 (write protect) to either ON or OFF. Setting it to ON will protect the program in the memory
from being overwritten. Setting it to OFF will allow the program to be overwritten.
(The factory setting is OFF.)
EPROM Memory Cassette
For an EPROM Memory Cassette, set pin no. 1 (ROM Type Selector) according
to the type of ROM that is mounted.
Pin no. 1
ROM type
Model
Capacity
Access speed
OFF
ON
27256
ROM-JD-B
16K words
150 ns
27512
ROM-KD-B
32K words
150 ns
17
Units
Section 2-2
2-2-3 Communications Boards
An optional Communications Board can be mounted in the CPU Unit to provide
communications with the following types of devices/systems through the communications port: SYSMAC LINK Systems, SYSMAC NET Systems, personal
computers, Programmable Terminals (PTs), bar code readers, temperature
controllers, devices with RS-232C or RS-422 interfaces, etc.
The following Communications Boards are available.
C200HW-COM01
C200HW-COM02-V1
C200HW-COM03-V1
Indicators
Indicators
Port A
(RS-232C)
Port A
(RS-422/
RS-485)
Bus
Connecting
Unit
connector
C200HW-COM04-EV1
C200HW-COM05-EV1
C200HW-COM06-EV1
Indicators
Indicators
Indicators
Bus
Connecting
Unit
connector
Port B
(RS-232C)
Port B
(RS-232C)
Port A
(RS-232C)
Port A
(RS-232C)
Port A
(RS-422/
RS-485)
Model
C200HW-COM01
Specifications
C200HW-COM02-V1
Connection port for SYSMAC LINK, SYSMAC NET, or
other Communications Units.
RS-232C port x 1
C200HW-COM03-V1
RS-422/485 port x 1
C200HW-COM04-EV1
Connection port for SYSMAC LINK, SYSMAC NET, or
other Communications Units.
C200HW-COM05-EV1
RS-232C port x 1 (supports protocol macros)
RS-232C port x 2 (supports protocol macros)
C200HW-COM06-EV1
RS-422/485 port x 1 (supports protocol macros)
RS-232C port x 1 (supports protocol macros)
18
Units
Section 2-2
Note Use either the C200HW-COM01 or a V1 Communications Board for the ZE-version C200HX/HG/HE CPU Units.
Indicators (LEDs)
The Communications Board indicators on the front panel of the CPU Unit indicate the status of the Board, as described in the following table.
Indicator
Color
RDY
Green
Status
Not lit
Flashing
Lit
COMB
Orange
Flashing
COMA
Orange
Flashing
Meaning
The Board cannot be used due to a hardware
error on the Board.
A setting error has been discovered in the PC
Setup or the protocol data.
The Board is operating properly and
communications are possible.
Communications are in progress with the
device connected to port B.
Communications are in progress with the
device connected to port A.
2-2-4 Power Supply Units
Power Supply Units provide power to the CPU Rack and the Expansion I/O
Racks. Power Supply Units are available for either AC or DC power input. The
numbers in the diagram correspond to the numbers of the following items in the
description. (The following diagram shows the C200HW-PA204S.)
Part Names and Functions
1. POWER indicator
L2/N
100 to 120 VAC/
200 to 240 VAC
L1
100 to 120
200 to 240
2. Terminals for external
connections
Note
L2/N
+24 VDC 0.8 A
L1
The AC input terminals may
be indicated as L1/N and L2
instead of L2/N and L1 on
some Units. However, there
is no difference in their functions or performance.
L1/N
L2
1, 2, 3...
1. POWER Indicator
The POWER indicator will be lit whenever the Power Supply Unit is outputting 5 V.
19
Units
Section 2-2
2. Terminals for External Connections
These terminals are connected as shown in the diagram below. The numbers in the diagram correspond to the numbers of the following items in the
description.
20
Supply
voltage
100 to
120 VAC or
t
200 to
240 VAC
(Select the
voltage using
the metal
short bar on
the voltage
selector
terminals.)
Output
capacity
5 VDC, 4.6 A,
30 W
24 VDC
Output
terminals
Without
RUN output
Model
Without
C200HW-PA204
24 VDC,
0.8 A
Without
C200HW-PA204S
Without
With
C200HW-PA204R
5 VDC, 9 A,
45 W
Without
With
C200HW-PA209R
5 VDC, 4.6 A,
30 W
Without
Without
C200HW-PD024
Units
Section 2-2
Terminal Connections
C200HW-PA204: AC Input
C200HW-PA204S: AC Input
L2/N
L2/N
1. AC Input
100 to 120 VAC/
200 to 240 VAC
100 to 120 VAC/
200 to 240 VAC
Input
1. AC Input
Input
L1
L1
2.
Voltage selector
terminals
2.
100 to 120
Close
200 to 240
Open
Voltage selector
terminals
3. LG
3. LG
4. GR
4. GR
NC
5. 24 VDC output
C200HW-PA204R: AC Input
24 VDC 0.8 A
Output
C200HW-PA209R: DC Input
L2/N
L2/N
1. AC Input
100 to 120 VAC/
200 to 240 VAC
100 to 120 VAC/
200 to 240 VAC
Input
1. AC Input
Input
L1
L1
2.
Voltage selector
terminals
100 to 120
Close
200 to 240
Open
2.
100 to 120
Close
200 to 240
Open
Voltage selector
terminals
3. LG
3. LG
4. GR
4. GR
7. RUN output
100 to 120
Close
200 to 240
Open
RUN OUTPUT
250 VAC
7. RUN output
24 VDC
2A
RUN OUTPUT
240 VAC
24 VDC
2 A Resistive
C200HW-PD024: DC Input
6. DC Input
24 VDC
3. LG
4. GR
1, 2, 3...
1. AC Input (C200HW-PA20jj Only)
Supply either 100 to 120 VAC or 200 to 240 VAC to the AC input terminals. If
one power supply phase of the equipment is grounded, connect the
grounded phase side to the L2/N (or L1/N if so indicated) terminal.
2. Voltage Selector Terminals (C200HW-PA20jj Only)
Short these terminals with a metal short bar when 100 to 120 VAC is being
supplied to the AC input terminals.
3. LG
Ground the LG terminal to 100 Ω or less to increase resistance to noise and
protect against possible electrical shock.
21
Units
Section 2-2
4. GR
Ground the GR terminal to 100 Ω or less to protect against possible electrical shock.
5. 24 VDC Output (C200HW-PA204S Only)
The 24 VDC output terminals can be used to supply power to DC Input Units.
The combined power consumption for both 5 V and 24 V must be 30 W or
less.
6. DC Input (C200HW-PD024 Only)
Supply 24 VDC to the DC input terminals.
7. RUN Output (C200HW-PA204R/PA209R Only)
The internal contact will turn ON when the CPU Unit is operating in RUN or
MONITOR mode. These terminals are available only on the C200HWPA204R.
22
Units
Section 2-2
Restrictions for the
C200HW-PA204R/PA209R
Use the C200HW-PA204R/PA209R Power Supply Unit only with the following
CPU Units and Backplanes. CPU Units and Backplanes with manufacturing
numbers earlier than the ones given cannot be used.
CPU Units
Manufacturing number (See below.)
Model
Made in Japan
20Z6 or later
2817 or later
19Z6 or later
2417 or later
25Z6 or later
0817 or later
19Z6 or later
1017or later
20Z6 or later
19Z6 or later
20Z6 or later
All models
C200HX-CPU65-E
C200HX-CPU54-E
C200HX-CPU44-E
C200HX-CPU34-E
C200HG-CPU63-E
C200HG-CPU53-E
C200HG-CPU43-E
C200HG-CPU33-E
C200HE-CPU42-E
C200HE-CPU32-E
C200HE-CPU11-E
C200HX/HG/HECPUjj-ZE
Made in the Netherlands
0147 or later
Backplanes (with C200HW-PA204R)
Manufacturing number (See below.)
Model
Made in Japan
0617 or later
19Z6 or later
24Z6 or later
20Z6 or later
C200HW-BC031
C200HW-BC051
C200HW-BC081
C200HW-BC101
Made in the Netherlands
0147 or later
Backplanes (with C200HW-PA209R)
CPU Backplanes
Same
manufacturing
number as for
C200HW-BC051
C200HW-PA204R.
! Caution
I/O Backplanes
Same
manufacturing
number as for
C200HW-BI051
C200HW-PA204R.
C200HW-BC031
C200HW-BI031
C200HW-BC081-V1 (-V1 or later)
C200HW-BI081-V1 (-V1 or later)
C200HW-BC101-V1 (-V1 or later)
C200HW-BI101-V1 (-V1 or later)
When using the C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit, be sure to use only the
Backplanes listed in the above table. Using a different Backplane may result in
malfunction due to deterioration of the base or pattern burnout.
Note Manufacturing numbers are as shown in the following diagram.
j
j
j
j
Year (Ex. 1997 = 7)
Month (1 to 9 = Jan to Sep, X/Y/Z = Oct/Nov/Dec
Day (01 to 31)
23
Units
Section 2-2
2-2-5 Backplanes
There are two types of Backplane: the CPU Backplane, used for the CPU Rack,
and the I/O Backplane, used for Expansion I/O Racks. The Backplane serves to
hold and connect the following types of Unit: the CPU Unit, the Power Supply
Unit, I/O Units, Special I/O Units, etc.
The components of the Backplanes are shown in the following diagrams and
described following them. The numbers in the diagram correspond to the numbers of the following items in the description.
CPU Backplane
4. Unit mounting slots
1. Backplane
mounting
screw
6. Unit lock levers
3. CPU Unit
connector
2. Power Supply
Unit connector
7. I/O Connecting Cable connector
5. Unit connector
I/O Backplane
4. Unit mounting slots
1. Backplane
mounting
screw
2. Power Supply
Unit connector
6. Unit lock levers
5. Unit connector
7. I/O Connecting Cable connector
1, 2, 3...
1. Backplane Mounting Screws
Mount the Backplane firmly using four M4 screws.
2. Power Supply Unit Connector
Connect the Power Supply Unit.
3. CPU Unit Connector
Connect the CPU Unit.
4. Unit Mounting Slots
Mount one Unit to each slot. There are 3, 5, 8, or 10 slots available on the
Backplane depending on the model of Backplane used.
5. Unit Connectors
Connect I/O Units, Special I/O Units, Interrupt Input Units, and/or Analog
Timer Units.
Note Attach a C500-COV01 Connector Cover to any slot that is not being used to prevent dust and dirt from entering the unused connectors.
6. Unit Lock Levers
The lock levers hold the Units in place. Press down on the level and pull up
on the Unit to release the lock.
7. I/O Connecting Cable Connector
Connect the I/O Cable from the CPU Rack to the first Expansion I/O Rack or
between adjacent Expansion I/O Racks to this connector.
24
Units
Section 2-2
2-2-6 Standard I/O Units
The following Standard I/O Units are available.
Input Units
Name
DC Input
p Unit
AC Input Unit
AC/DC Input Unit
Model number
Specifications
C200H-ID211
C200H-ID212
C200H-IA121
12 to 24 VDC
24 VDC
100 to 120 VAC
No. of
points
8 pts
16 pts
8 pts
C200H-IA122/IA122V
100 to 120 VAC
16 pts
C200H-IA221
200 to 240 VAC
8 pts
C200H-IA222/IA222V
200 to 240 VAC
16 pts
C200H-IM211
12 to 24 VAC/DC
8 pts
C200H-IM212
24 VAC/DC
16 pts
Note The C200H-ID001/002 cannot be used on the following Backplanes: C200HWBCjj1/BIjj1.
Output Units
Name
Contact Output Unit
Model number
C200H-OC221
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
No. of
points
8 pts
C200H-OC222
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
12 pts
C200H-OC225
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VAC (For resistive loads)
16 pts
C200H-OC223
5 pts
C200H-OC222N
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
Independent commons
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
Independent commons
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
C200H-OC226N
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
16 pts
C200H-OC224N
8 pts
C200H-OD411
C200H-OD211
C200H-OD212
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
Independent commons
1 A, 12 to 48 VDC
0.3 A, 24 VDC
0.3 A, 24 VDC
C200H-OD213
2.1 A, 24 VDC
8 pts
C200H-OD214
0.8 A, 24 VDC; source type (PNP); with load short protection
8 pts
C200H-OD216
5 to 24 VDC; source type (PNP)
8 pts
C200H-OD217
5 to 24 VDC; source type (PNP)
12 pts
C200H-OD21A
1.0 A, 24 VDC; source type (PNP); with load short protection
16 pts
C200H-OA221
1 A, 250 VAC
8 pts
C200H-OA222V
0.3 A, 250 VAC
12 pts
C200H-OA223
1.2 A, 250 VAC
8 pts
C200H-OA224
0.5 A, 250 VAC
12 pts
C200H-OC224
Transistor Output
p
U i
Unit
Triac Output Unit
Specifications
8 pts
12 pts
8 pts
12 pts
16 pts
Optional Products
The following optional products are available for use with Standard I/O Units.
• I/O Unit Cover: C200H-COV11
Cover for 10-pin terminal block.
• Space Unit: C200H-SP001
Used for vacant slots.
25
Units
Section 2-2
Components
The Standard I/O Units come in three shapes; A-shape, B-shape, and E-shape.
Refer to Appendix D Specifications for the dimensions of each Unit. The numbers in the diagram correspond to the numbers of the following items in the
description.
A-shape I/O Unit (10-terminal Terminal Block)
B-shape I/O Unit (19-terminal Terminal Block)
1. I/O Unit lock notch
2. Nameplate
3. I/O indicators:
Indicate ON/OFF
status of points
4. 10-terminal terminal block
4. 19-terminal terminal block
E-shape I/O Unit (10-terminal Terminal Block)
I/O Unit lock notch
Nameplate
I/O indicators
Indicate ON/OFF
status of points
10-terminal terminal block
Note The C200H-OC226 is an extended B-shape I/O Unit and its dimensions are different from those of the B-shape I/O Unit shown above.
26
Units
Section 2-2
1, 2, 3...
1. I/O Unit Lock Notch
The lock notch fits into the Backplane to hold the Unit in place.
2. Nameplate
The nameplate shows the model number of the I/O Unit.
3. I/O Indicators (LEDs)
The indicators show the ON/OFF status of the I/O points. The arrangement
of the indicators varies with the model of I/O Unit, as shown in the following
tables.
4. Terminal Block
The terminal block is used to wiring I/O. There terminals blocks are removable and consist of two parts.
Units with 10-terminal
Terminal Blocks
Units with 19-terminal
Terminal Blocks
Appearance
Appearance
Unit type
Model numbers
8-point Units
ID211, IM211, IA121,
IA221, OC221, and
OA216
8-point Units
F: Fuse burnt out
(with LED)
OD213, OD411, OA221,
and OA223
8-point Units
ALARM indictors
(with LEDs)
OD214
5-point Units
OD223
Unit type
Model numbers
16-point Units
ID212, IA122, IA122V,
IA222, IA222V, IM212,
OC225, OC226N, OD212,
and OD21A
12-point Units
OC222, OC222N, OD211,
OD217, OA222V, and
OA224
8-point Units
OC224 and OC224N
2-2-7 Group-2 High-density I/O Units
Group-2 High-density I/O Units come in two varieties; C-shape and D-shape.
The shape of the two varieties is the same, but C-shape Units have only one connector, while the D-shape Units have two. C-shape Units have 32 I/O points and
D-shape Units have 64 I/O points.
Group-2 High-density I/O Units can be used with C200H-CPU21/22/23/31 CPU
Racks and Expansion I/O Racks. They cannot be used with Slave Racks.
27
Units
Section 2-2
Unit
DC Input Unit
Transistor Output Unit
Specifications
Shape
Model
12 VDC; 64 pts
D
C200H-ID111
24 VDC; 32 pts
C
24 VDC; 64 pts
D
4.5 VDC,16 mA to
26.4 VDC,100 mA; 32 pts
4.5 VDC,16 mA to
26.4 VDC,100 mA; 64 pts
24 VDC, 0.5 A (5A/Unit); 32 pts
C
C200H-ID217
C200H-ID218
C200H-ID216
C200H-ID219
C200H-OD218
D
C200H-OD219
C
C200H-OD21B
C-shape Units (32-point Units)
1. I/O Unit lock notch
2. Nameplate
3. I/O indicators
4. I/O number setting switch
5. 40-pin connector
D-shape Units (64-point Units)
1. I/O Unit lock notch
2. Nameplate
3. I/O indicators LED
4. I/O number setting switch
6. Indicator switch
5. 40-pin connectors
28
Units
Section 2-2
1, 2, 3...
1. I/O Unit Lock Notch
The lock notch fits into the Backplane to hold the Unit in place.
2. Nameplate
The nameplate shows the model number of the I/O Unit.
3. I/O Indicators (LED)
The indicators show the ON/OFF status of the I/O points. The arrangement
of the indicators varies with the model of I/O Unit, as shown in the following
tables.
4. I/O Number Setting Switch
This switch is used to set the I/O number for the Unit. Set the number to
between 0 and F for Units with one 40-pin connector and to between 0 and 8
or A and E for Units with two 40-pin connectors.
5. 40-pin Connectors
The number of connectors depends on the Unit.
6. Indicator Switch
Determines whether the status of connector 1 or connector 2 I/O points are
shown on the I/O indicators.
I/O Indicators
Units with One 40-pin
Connector
Units with Two 40-pin
Connectors
Appearance
Appearance
Unit type
Model numbers
32 points Unit
ID216 and ID218
32 points Unit
F: Fuse burnt out
(with LED)
OD218 and OD21B
Unit type
Model numbers
64 points Unit
ID111, ID217, and ID219
64 points Unit
F: Fuse burnt out
(with LED)
OD219
29
Units
Section 2-2
2-2-8 High-density I/O Units Classified as Special I/O Units
Some High-density I/O Units are classified as Special I/O Units. Up to 10 or up to
16 Special I/O Units can be connected to a PC depending on the CPU Unit that is
used. These Units have two 24-pin connectors. In general, these Units control
32 I/O points, although some Units can control 128 I/O points when set for
dynamic operation.
Refer to Appendix B Specifications for detailed specifications and dimensions of
the Units.
Unit
Model Number
Specifications
TTL Input Unit
C200H-ID501
5 VDC, 32 inputs
DC Input Unit
C200H-ID215
24 VDC; 32 inputs
TTL Output Unit
C200H-OD501
5 VDC, 32 outputs
Transistor Output Unit
C200H-OD215
24 VDC; 32 outputs
TTL I/O Unit
DC Input/Transistor
p
Output
p Unit
C200H-MD501
5 VDC, 16 inputs, 16 outputs
C200H-MD115
C200H-MD215
12 VDC; 16 inputs, 16 outputs
24 VDC; 16 inputs, 16 outputs
1. I/O Unit lock notch
2. Nameplate
3. I/O indicators LED
4. Unit number setting switch
5. 24-pin connectors
1, 2, 3...
1. I/O Unit Lock Notch
The lock notch fits into the Backplane to hold the Unit in place.
2. Nameplate
The nameplate shows the model number of the Unit.
3. I/O Indicators (LED)
The indicators show the ON/OFF status of the I/O points.
4. Unit Number Setting Switch
Turn OFF the power supply to the PC and set the unit number to between 0
and F using a flat-blade screwdriver, being careful not to damage the slot or
leave the switch set half-way between two settings.
5. 24-pin Connectors
There are two 24-pin connectors.
30
Peripheral Devices
2-3
Section 2-3
Peripheral Devices
There are various Peripheral Devices that can be use to support C200HX/
C200HG/C200HE operation. These Peripheral Devices are introduced in this
section.
2-3-1 Programming Consoles
There are two Programming Consoles that can be used with the C200HX/
C200HG/C200HE: the C200H-PRO27-E and the CQM1-PRO01-E. The following illustration shows the C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console.
Connected to Peripheral Port on CPU Unit.
C200H-CN222 (2 m) or
C200H-CN422 (4 m), Connecting
Cable
C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console
As shown in the illustration, the C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console connects to the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE CPU Unit with C200H-CN222 or
C200H-CN422 Connecting Cable, which must be purchased separately.
The CQM1-PRO01-E Programming Console comes with 2 m of Connecting
Cable.
31
Peripheral Devices
Section 2-3
2-3-2 CX-Programmer
The CX-Programmer is a Programming Device that runs on Windows. It is used
for full-scale programming operations. Use the following Connecting Cables to
connect the computer running the CX-Programmer with the C200HX/HG/
HE(-Z) PCs.
Connecting Cables for C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) PCs
Unit
CPU Unit
Unit port
Computer
Built-in
peripheral
port
Built-in
RS-232C
port
D-Sub,
9-pin,
p , female
IBM PT/AT
or
compatible
IBM PT/AT
or
compatible
Computer
port
D-Sub, 9-pin
male
D-Sub, 9-pin
male
Network
type
Peripheral
bus or
SYSWAY
SYSWAY
Host Link
Unit (See
note.)
(C200HLK201-V1 or
C120-LK201
–V1)
RS-232C
port,
D-Sub,
25-pin
female
IBM PT/AT
or
compatible
D-Sub, 9-pin
male
SYSWAY
Communications Board
RS-232C
port,
D-Sub, 9-pin
female
IBM PT/AT
or
compatible
D-Sub, 9-pin
male
SYSWAY
Model
Length
Remarks
CQM1-CIF02
3.3 m
---
XW2Z-200SCV/500S-CV
2 m/5 m
ESD (electrostatic discharge)
countermeasures
XW2Z-200S-V/
500S-V
XW2Z-200P-V/
500P-V
2 m/5 m
---
2 m/5 m
---
XW2Z-200SCV/500S-CV
2 m/5 m
ESD (electrostatic discharge)
countermeasures
XW2Z-200S-V/
500S-V
2 m/5 m
---
Note The Host Link Units cannot be used to connect the CX-Programmer to a Z-type
PC (i.e., one with a -Z suffix on the model number).
32
Expanded System Configurations
2-4
Section 2-4
Expanded System Configurations
2-4-1 Required Mounting Conditions
A maximum of 16 Special I/O Units including PC Link Units can be mounted to
any slot of CPU, Expansion I/O, and Slave Racks. I/O word numbers 100 to 199,
400 to 459, and DM 1000 to DM 2599 are allocated to each Special I/O Unit.
High-density I/O Units can be mounted Remote I/O Slave Units only when the
Remote I/O Slave Units are connected to C200H-RM001-PV1 or
C200H-RM201 Remote I/O Master Units.
The number of Special I/O Units used with a Slave Rack is limited by data transmission considerations, as shown in the table below. The numbers in the table
indicate the maximum number of Units of groups A, B, C, or D which can be used
with a single Slave Rack.
A
High-speed Counter Units
Position Control Units
(C200H-NC111/112,
C200HW-NC113/213)
ASCII Units
Analog I/O Units
ID Sensor Units
Fuzzy Logic Units
4 units max.
B
C
High-density and Mixed I/O
Units
Temperature Control Units
Cam Positioner Units
Heat/Cool Temperature
Control Unit
PID Control Unit
Temperature Sensor Units
Voice Units
8 units max.
6 units max.
Note
D
Position Control Units
(C200H-NC211,
C200HW-NC413)
Motion Control Units
2 units max.
1. When a combination of Units from groups A, B, C, and D is used, the number
from each group must satisfy both the following equations:
3A + B + 2C + 6D ≤ 12
A+B+C+D≤8
2. Other Units can be added until the total number of Units reaches ten. If PC
Link Units are used, the number of Units including the PC Link Units must
not exceed ten.
2-4-2 Special I/O Units
It is possible to connect a variety of Special I/O Units to the C200HX/
C200HG/C200HE Racks.
High-density I/O Units
(Special I/O Units)
The TTL Input Unit, DC Input Unit, TTL Output Unit, Transistor Output Unit, TTL
I/O Unit, and DC Input/Transistor Output Unit are High-density I/O Units.
The C200H-ID501, C200H-OD501, and C200H-MD501 are I/O Units for the
TTL Unit.
Eight input points each of the C200H-ID501, C200H-ID215, C200H-MD501,
C200H-MD115, and C200H-MD215 can be set for pulse input.
A High-density I/O Unit can retrieve pulse input, which is shorter in length than
that of the High-density I/O Unit cycle time, as an input signal when the Highdensity I/O Unit is set for pulse input.
33
Expanded System Configurations
Section 2-4
The C200H-MD501, C200H-MD115, and C200H-MD215 can each be set for
128 dynamic input points (64 points x two circuits) and the C200H-OD501 and
C200H-OD215 can each be set for 128 dynamic output points (64 points x two
circuits).
High-speed Counter Units
The High-speed Counter Units have the following six operation modes.
Linear, circular, preset, gate, latch, and sampling operation modes
The High-speed Counter Units, which have a counting speed of 50 kcps, can be
used for phase-difference pulse input, adding and subtracting pulse input, and
pulse and direction input. The High-speed Counter Units have eight-point output
per single axis.
Rotary Encoder
Position Control Units
The Position Control Units have pulse-train output, thus enabling connection to
stepping motor drivers or servomotor drivers.
The C200H-NC111 and C200H-NC112 are for a single axis, and the
C200H-NC211 is for two axes.
Stepping motor
driver or servomotor driver with
pulse-train input.
Stepping motor
or servomotor
5-V power supply
34
Expanded System Configurations
Analog I/O Units
Section 2-4
The Analog Input (A/D) Units retrieve analog inputs and the Analog Output (D/A)
Unit sends analog outputs.
The following Analog I/O Units are available:
C200H-AD001 with 4-point analog input, C200H-AD002 with 8-point analog
input, C200H-DA001 with 2-point analog output, and C200H-DA002 with
4-point analog output
The Analog Input (AD) Unit is used.
Analog input
Preamplifier
transducer
Sensor
Analog output
Servomotor controller
variable adjuster
Motor
The Analog Output (DA) Unit is used.
Temperature Sensor Units
The following table lists Temperature Sensor Unit models and available temperature sensors.
Only one kind of temperature sensor can be connected to the C200H-TS001 or
C200H-TS002. Each Temperature Sensor Unit connects to a maximum of four
temperature sensor inputs.
Model
Connectable temperature sensor
C200H-TS001
K (CA)/K (IC)
C200H-TS002
K (CA)/L (Fe-CuNi) (available for DIN)
C200H-TS101
JPt 100 Ω
C200H-TS102
Pt 100 Ω (available for DIN/1989JIS)
Thermocouple: K (CA), J (IC), L (Fe-CuNi)
Platinum resistance thermometer: JPt100 Ω, Pt100 Ω
ASCII Unit
BASIC programs can be input to the ASCII Unit via its port 1 from any personal
computer in terminal mode if the personal computer incorporates an RS-232C
interface.
It is possible to write BASIC programs with an IBM PC/AT or compatible.
Port 1
(RS-232C)
Port 1/2
BASIC Program:
Personal computer
Input: Bar code reader
Output: Printer and plasma display
35
Expanded System Configurations
Voice Unit
Section 2-4
Voice messages can be input from dynamic microphones or cassette tape
recorders and output from loudspeakers or headsets via the Voice Unit.
The Voice Unit incorporates a sentence function and word combination function,
either of which can be selected to record voice messages for 64 seconds maximum.
Voice can be saved on floppy disks with an IBM PC/AT or compatible.
Voice input
Voice output
Voice saving/Re-input
Microphone or cassette tape player
Headset or speaker
Personal computer, or PROM Writer
C200H-CN224 Connecting Cable (2 m long with
6- and 25-pin connectors)
ID Sensor Units
The ID Sensor Units are used to construct non-contact information recognition
systems.
By connecting a R/W Head or R/W Antenna to an ID Sensor Unit, data can be
written to the Data Carrier attached to each moving object and the data of the
Data Carrier can be read by the C200HS.
The following models of ID Sensor Units are available.
Electromagnetic induction model: C200H-IDS01-V1
Microwave model:
C200H-IDS21
C200H-PRO27-E
Programming Console
R/W Head
R/W Antenna
36
Data Carrier
Expanded System Configurations
Section 2-4
Fuzzy Logic Unit
The C200H-FZ001 Fuzzy Logic Unit incorporates a high-functional fuzzy Logic
processor and allows high-speed fuzzy logic.
A personal computer can be connected to the Fuzzy Logic Unit via RS-232C
cables for software development and monitoring. Use the C500-SU981-E Fuzzy
Support Software for IBM PC/AT or compatible personal computers.
Temperature Control Units
Thermocouples or platinum resistance thermometers connect to the Temperature Control Unit. With the built-in selector of the Temperature Control Unit, ten
kinds of thermocouples or two kinds of platinum resistance thermometers can
be selected.
Select the control output of the Temperature Control Unit from the following.
Model
C200H-TC001
C200H-TC002
C200H-TC003
C200H-TC101
C200H-TC102
C200H-TC103
Temperature sensor input
Thermocouple:
p
R S,
R,
S K (CA),
(CA) J (IC),
(IC) T (CC),
(CC)
(CRC) B,
B N,
N L (IC),
(IC) U (CC)
E (CRC),
Platinum resistance thermometer:
JP 100 Pt100
JPt100,
P 100
Temperature Control Unit
Control output
Transistor output
Voltage output
Current output
Transistor output
Voltage output
Current output
Data Setting Console
37
Expanded System Configurations
Cam Positioner Unit
Section 2-4
A single C200H-CP114 Cam Positioner Unit is as powerful as 48 mechanical
cams because it can complete jobs that normally require 48 mechanical cams.
It is possible to set 16-point external output and 32-point internal output as cam
output. The 32-point internal output can be retrieved as data by the C200HS.
Cam Positioner Unit
Heat/Cool Temperature
Control Units
The Heat/Cool Temperature Control Units measure the temperature of an object
with a connected temperature sensor (thermocouple or platinum resistance
thermometer), and heats and cools according to a preset control mode.
Select the control output of the Heat/Cool Temperature Control Unit from the following.
Model
C200H-TV001
C200H-TV002
C200H-TV003
C200H-TV101
C200H-TV102
C200H-TV103
Temperature sensor input
Thermocouple:
p
R S,
R,
S K (CA),
(CA) J (IC),
(IC) T (CC),
(CC)
E (CRC),
(CRC) B,
B N,
N L (IC),
(IC) U (CC)
Platinum resistance thermometer:
JP 100 Pt100
JPt100,
P 100
Heat/Cool Temperature Control Unit
38
Data Setting Console
Control output
Transistor output
Voltage output
Current output
Transistor output
Voltage output
Current output
Data Setting Console
Expanded System Configurations
PID Control Unit
Section 2-4
The PID Control Unit scales inputs from connected sensors and then carries out
PID control according to preset control mode.
Select the control output of the PID Control Unit from the following.
Model
Control output
C200H-PID01
Transistor output
C200H-PID02
Voltage output
C200H-PID03
Current output
PID Control Unit
Data Setting Console
39
Expanded System Configurations
Section 2-4
2-4-3 Link Systems and Networks
The C200HX/C200HG/C200HE can be included in an expanded system configuration including a Host Link System (SYSMAC WAY), a PC Link System, Optical or Wired Remote I/O Systems (SYSMAC BUS), CompoBus/S, DeviceNet,
SYSMAC NET Link or SYSMAC LINK System. All of these can be used in common with the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE. In addition, the following Unit can be
connected: B7A Interface Unit. Specifications for all of these Units are provided
in Appendix B Specifications.
SYSMAC LINK Systems
OMRON’s SYSMAC LINK System is a communications network that connects
up to 62 nodes to provide data links, data transfers, and datagram services.
CPU Unit
SYSMAC LINK Unit
C200HW-SLK13/SLK14
(optical)
C200HW-SLK23/SLK24
(coaxial cable)
SYSMAC-series PC
• Data links provide automatic transfer of up to 2,966 words of data in the LR
and/or DM Areas.
• Data transfers of up to 256 words each can be implemented by programming
the NETWORK READ (RECV(98)) and NETWORK WRITE (SEND(90))
instructions in the user program.
• Data transfers via datagrams are also available using a command/response
format.
• A C200HW-COM01 or C200HW-COM04-E Communications Board and a
C200HW-CE001 or C200HW-CE002 Bus Connection Unit are required to use
a SYSMAC LINK Unit.
The C200H-APS03 Auxiliary Power Supply Unit is used as a backup power supply for optical SYSMAC LINK Systems.
40
Expanded System Configurations
SYSMAC NET Link Systems
Section 2-4
OMRON’s SYSMAC NET Link System is an FA-oriented limited-area network
that connects up to 126 nodes to provide datagram services, data transfers, and
data links.
SYSMAC NET Link Unit
C200HS-SNT32
CPU Unit
Line server
Central power supply
FA computer
SYSMAC-series PC
• Data transfers via datagrams are implemented using a command/response
format.
• Data transfers can also be implemented for up to 990 words each by programming the NETWORK READ (RECV(98)) and NETWORK WRITE (SEND(90))
instructions in the user program.
• Data links provide automatic transfer of up to 32 words of data in the LR Area
and/or up to 99 words of data in other data areas.
• A C200HW-COM01 or C200HW-COM04-E Communications Board and a
C200HW-CE001 or C200HW-CE002 Bus Connection Unit are required to use
a SYSMAC NET Link Unit.
The C200H-APS01 and C200H-APS02 Power Supply Adapters are used to
connect to a central power supply (and must be mounted in the slot immediately
to the left of the SYSMAC NET Link Unit).
Note Refer to the SYSMAC NET Link System Manual (W178) for further information.
41
Expanded System Configurations
Host Link Systems
Section 2-4
A maximum of two Host Link Units can be mounted to slots in either the CPU
Rack or an Expansion I/O Rack. The following Host Link Units are available:
C200H-LK101-PV1 (optical cable)
C200H-LK201-PV1 (RS-232C)
C200H-LK202-V1 (RS-422)
For details, refer to the SYSMAC C-series Rack PCs SYSMAC WAY - Host Link
Units System Manual (W143).
Host Link Unit
PC Link System
FA computer
A PC Link System can be used to transfer data between PCs by means of LR
0000 through LR 6315. A maximum of two C200H-LK401 PC Link Units can be
mounted to slots in either the CPU Rack or an Expansion I/O Rack. For details,
refer to the PC Link System Manual (W135).
PC Link Unit
C200HS
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE
Note The PC Link Units must be counted as Special I/O Units.
42
Expanded System Configurations
CompoBus/S Systems
Section 2-4
The CompoBus/S is a high-speed I/O data communications system designed to
meet the needs of time-critical FA applications.
CompoBus/S Master Unit
I/O Terminal
Sensor Terminal
Bit Chain Terminal
• The CompoBus/S Master Unit is mounted to the CPU Rack or an Expansion
I/O Rack. The number of Master Units that can be mounted is indicated below.
Number of Mountable Master Units
C200HX/HE, C200HG-CPU3j/4j/(-Z)
10 Units when used as 1 Special I/O Unit (i.e., 10 words allocated)
5 Units when used as 2 Special I/O Units (i.e., 20 words allocated)
C200HX, C200HG-CPU5j/6j/8j(-Z)
16 Units when used as 1 Special I/O Unit (i.e., 10 words allocated)
5 Units when used as 2 Special I/O Units (i.e., 20 words allocated)
Note Unit numbers A to F can be set only with the following CPU Units.
C200HX-CPU54(-Z)
C200HX-CPU64(-Z)
C200HX-CPU65-Z
C200HX-CPU85-Z
C200HG-CPU53(-Z)
C200HG-CPU63(-Z)
• For each Master Unit, up to 32 slaves can be connected for a maximum of 256
points of I/O data communications (8 input words and 8 output words).
• The Special I/O Area is used for data transmissions.
• A wide variety of slaves are available to support relay, sensor, and other I/O.
• Bit Chain Terminals can also be used as slaves to send and receive small
quantities of I/O points at greater distances.
Note The CompoBus/S Master Units must be counted as Special I/O Units.
43
Expanded System Configurations
DeviceNet Systems
Section 2-4
The DeviceNet is an I/O data communications system conforming to the DeviceNet standard being developed to standardize device-level networks for FA.
CQM1 (I/O Link Unit)
DeviceNet Master Unit
I/O Terminal
Adapter
Sensor Terminal
Analog Input Terminal
Analog Output Terminal
• The DeviceNet Master Unit is mounted to the CPU Rack or an Expansion I/O
Rack. Only one Master Units can be mounted.
• Up to 50 slaves can be connected for a maximum of 1,600 points of I/O data
communications (50 input words and 50 output words).
• The IR Area is used for data transmissions (outputs: IR 50 to IR 99; inputs: IR
350 to IR 399).
• A wide variety of slaves are available to support relay, sensor, analog and other
I/O.
Note
44
1. The DeviceNet System cannot be used at the same time as a Remote I/O
System.
2. The DeviceNet Master Units must be counted as Special I/O Units.
3. Slaves made by other manufacturers can be connected as long as they conform to the DeviceNet standard.
Expanded System Configurations
Remote I/O Systems
Section 2-4
A maximum of two Optical or Wired Remote I/O Master Units can be mounted to
slots in either the CPU Rack or an Expansion I/O Rack. A maximum total of five
Slave Racks, each with a single Slave Unit, can be connected. C500 Slave
Racks can be used, but each C500 Slave Rack must be counted as two Racks in
calculating the total. For details, refer to the SYSMAC C-series Rack PCs Wired
Remote I/O System Manual (W120) or SYSMAC C-series Optical Remote I/O
System Manual (W136).
Remote I/O Slave Unit
Remote I/O Slave Unit
C500 Remote I/O Slave Unit
C500 Remote I/O Slave Unit
Optical I/O Units
I/O Interface Terminal
I/O terminal
Optical Systems
A maximum total of 64 Optical I/O Units can be connected in an optical system
(32 words).
Note
1. The number of Slave Racks is not related to the number of Master Units.
2. If the number of Optical I/O Units exceeds 32, a B500-RPT01(-P) Repeater
Unit is required.
3. Optical and Wired Units cannot be mixed in the same system.
Wired Systems
A maximum total of 32 I/O Interface Terminals and I/O Terminals (32 words) can
be connected in a wired system.
45
Expanded System Configurations
Controller Link Systems
Section 2-4
Controller Link Units can be mounted to C200HX/HG/HE CPU Racks to create
automatic data links that can be freely set between C200HX/HG/HE, CVM1,
and/or CV-series PCs. Controller Link Support Boards are also available so that
IBM PC/AT or compatibles can also be included in the Controller Link System.
Controller Link Systems support a message service that can be used as
required for communications using the SEND and RECV instructions. An example configuration for C200HX/HG/HE PCs is shown below.
Controller Link Unit
(C200HW-CLK21)
C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit
Bus Connection Unit
(C200HW-CE001/CE002/CE012)
Communications Board
(C200HW-COM01/COM04-EV1)
• Controller Link Systems are wired using multidrop connections with twistedpair cable. Each System can include up to 32 nodes and can extend up to 1 km
for 500-Kbps communications and up to 500 m for 2-Mbps communications.
• For data links, each PC node can read/write up to 8,000 words and each computer node, up to 32,000 words. The data link words can be either set automatically or that can be set manually to more efficiently meet the needs of specific
applications using Controller Link Support Software.
• The message service can be used to send up to 2,012 bytes of data at a time.
• A Communications Board (C200HW-COM01/COM04-EV1) and a Bus Connection Unit (C200HW-CE001/CE002/CE012) are required to mount a Controller Link Unit to a C200HX/HG/HE PC.
• The Controller Link Unit cannot be used with the C200HE-CPU11-E/ZE.
46
Expanded System Configurations
Section 2-4
The PC Card Units allows you to expand PC capabilities by adding a PC card.
The PC card can be used to save and retrieve CIO, DM, EM, and other data area
contents between the CPU Unit and the PC card from the ladder-diagram program (using the CMCR instruction). An Ethernet card can also be used to connect to an Ethernet network so that data area or ladder-diagram program contents can be read or written from computers on the network. Examples of PC
Card Unit Applications are shown below.
PC Card Unit
PC Card Unit
(C200HW-PCU01)
PC Card Unit Ethernet Set
(C200HW-PCS01-EV1)
C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit
C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit
Bus Connection Unit
(C200HW-CE001/CE002/CE012)
Memory
card
Bus Connection Unit
(C200HW-CE001/CE002/CE012)
Ethernet Card
(SRAM, flash, ATA)
MAU
Hub
Computer
Computer
Ethernet Unit
Note A media attachment unit (MAU) is
required to connect twisted-pair
cable to the CV-series Ethernet Unit.
• Program data read via a PC Card Unit cannot be edited on the Ladder Support
Software.
• PCMCIA2.1 PC cards are used (except for 3.3V cards). Two PC card interface
slots are provided. Up to two type I or type II cards can be mounted, or one type
III card can be mounted, enabling applications of standard SRAM, ATA, flash
memory, and other PC cards.
• A Communications Board (C200HW-COM01/COM04-EV1) and a Bus Connection Unit (C200HW-CE001/CE002/CE012) are required to mount a PC
Card Unit to a C200HX/HG/HE PC.
47
SECTION 3
Installation and Wiring
This section describes how to install a PC System, including mounting the various Units and wiring the System. Be sure to
follow the instructions carefully during installing. Improper installation can cause the PC to malfunction, resulting in
extremely dangerous situations.
3-1
3-2
Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-1 Installation and Wiring Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-2 Installing Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-3 Mounting Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-4 Mounting Dimensions (Units: mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-5 DIN Track Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-6 Mounting Units to the Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-7 I/O Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-8 Mounting Memory Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-9 Mounting a Communications Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-1 Power Supply Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-2 Standard I/O Unit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-3 Electrical Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50
50
51
53
54
55
58
60
61
62
63
63
68
74
49
Section 3-1
Installation Environment
3-1
Installation Environment
This section details the necessary environmental conditions for installing the
PC. Proper installation procedures and a proper environment are essential to
getting the best performance and reliability from your PC.
! Caution
Static electricity can damage PC components. Your body can carry an electrostatic charge, especially when the humidity is low. Before touching the PC, be
sure to first touch a grounded metallic object, such as a metal water pipe, in order
to discharge any static build-up.
3-1-1 Installation and Wiring Precautions.
Ambient Conditions
Do not install the PC in any of the following locations. Doing so will affect PC life
and may adversely affect operating performance.
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Locations subject to ambient temperatures lower than 0°C or higher than 55°C
(or higher than 45°C when using a Programming Console).
• Locations subject to ambient humidity lower than 35% or higher than 85%.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in
the following locations.
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power supplies.
Cooling
There are two points to consider in order to ensure that the PC does not overheat. The first is the clearance between the Racks, and the second is installation
of a cooling fan.
Clearance between Racks
The Racks need to have sufficient room between each other to allow for I/O wiring, and additional room to ensure that the I/O wiring does not hamper cooling.
The Racks must also be mounted so that the total length of the Connecting
Cable between all Racks in a given series does not exceed 12 m. As a general
rule, about 70 to 120 mm should be left between any two Racks. Consider factors such as the width of the wiring duct, wiring length, ventilation, and ease of
access to Units, when determining the spacing between Racks. Greater space
is required between Racks when using certain CPU Bus and Special I/O Units.
Refer to the operation manuals for the Units you are using for details.
50
Section 3-1
Installation Environment
Cooling Fan
A cooling fan is not always necessary, but may be needed in some installations.
Try to avoid mounting the PC in a warm area or over a source of heat. A cooling
fan is needed if the ambient temperature may become higher than that specified. If the PC is mounted in an enclosure, install a cooling fan, as shown in the
following diagram, to maintain the ambient temperature within specifications.
Fan
PC
Louver
Noise Resistance
Abide by the following precautions to help increase resistance to noise.
• Do not mount the PC in a control panel containing high-voltage equipment.
• Install the PC at least 200 mm from power lines.
• Ground the mounting plate between the PC and the mounting surface.
3-1-2 Installing Racks
The following figures show two views, each consisting of a mounted CPU Rack
and two Expansion I/O Racks. Provide a space of 20 mm minimum on the upper
and lower sides of each duct for ventilation and Unit replacement.
Example Duct Layout
118 to 153 mm
CPU
30 mm
30 mm
Duct
I/O
40 mm
30 mm
Duct
I/O
Each Rack must be mounted vertically, that is, with the printing on the front panels oriented as it would normally read. Racks may be mounted to any sturdy support meeting the environmental specifications.
Whenever possible, the Racks should be mounted to metal-plated mounting
plate that are securely grounded. If all of the Racks cannot be mounted to the
same mounting plate, the individual plates should be securely connected
together using 3 wires of at least 2 mm2 in cross-sectional area. The Backplanes
are mounted to the plate(s) with four M4 screws each.
Whenever possible, use wiring conduit to hold the I/O wiring. Standard wiring
conduit should be used, and it should be long enough to completely contain the
I/O wiring and keep it separated from other cables.
51
Section 3-1
Installation Environment
Note Tighten the PC Rack mounting screws, terminal block screws, and cable screws
to the torque of 1.2 N S m.
! Caution
I/O Connecting Cables
Racks must be mounted horizontally so that the Units are upright (i.e., not upside
down or lying on their backs). The Units can overhead and malfunction if not
mounted properly.
Each I/O Connecting Cable can be up to 10 m long, but the sum total of all cables
between the CPU Rack and Expansion I/O Racks must be 12 m or less.
The duct work shown in the following diagram is recommended to hold I/O wiring. Although optional, this duct work can be used to house the wires from the I/O
Units that run along the sides of the Racks, keeping the wires from becoming
entangled. This figure illustrates the correct way to mount the Racks.
Input duct
Output duct
Power duct
200 mm min.
CPU
Rack
Breakers,
fuses
Expansion
I/O Rack
Power
equipment
such as
transformers and
magnetic
relays
Fuses, relays, timers, etc. (NOT
heat-generating
equipment, power
equipment, etc.)
Terminal blocks
for PC
Terminal blocks for
power equipment
Note When using the C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit at an ambient temperature exceeding 50°C, in order to improve air circulation, ensure that there is a
52
Section 3-1
Installation Environment
gap of at least 80 mm between the top of the Power Supply Unit and the top of the
panel, wiring ducts, parts, or any other structures.
Ducts, etc.
80 mm min.
C200HW-PA209R
80 mm min.
Ducts, etc.
80 mm min.
C200HW-PA209R
80 mm min.
Ducts, etc.
3-1-3 Mounting Height
The mounting height of CPU Racks, Expansion I/O Racks, or Slave Racks is
118 mm or 153 mm depending on the type of I/O Units mounted. If Peripheral
Devices or connection cables are attached, the additional dimensions must be
taken into account. Allow sufficient clearance in the control panel in which the
PC is mounted.
118 to 153* mm
Approx. 180 to 223* mm
Note: Figures marked with an asterisk are for
when the C200HW-PA209R is mounted.
53
Section 3-1
Installation Environment
3-1-4 Mounting Dimensions (Units: mm)
Backplanes
7
A±0.2
Four, M4
CPU Backplane
130
68 to 108
130
118±0.2
80 to 120
I/O Backplane
118±0.2
6
Four, M4
W
Model
CPU Backplane
p
I/O Backplane
p
C200HW-BC031
C200HW-BC051
C200HW-BC081-V1
C200HW-BC101-V1
C200HW-BI031
C200HW-BI051
C200HW-BI081-V1
C200HW-BI101-V1
A
246 mm
316 mm
421 mm
491 mm
175 mm
245 mm
350 mm
420 mm
W
260 mm
330 mm
435 mm
505 mm
189 mm
259 mm
364 mm
434 mm
Note The C200HW-PA204R/PA209R cannot be used with all combinations of CPU
Units and Backplanes. Refer to page 23, Restrictions for the C200HW-PA204R/
PA209R, for details.
54
Section 3-1
Installation Environment
Backplane Insulation Plates
If there is an electric potential difference between grounds when devices are
wired separately, then use a Backplane Insulation Plate. There are four models
available, corresponding to the number of slots in the Backplane. The dimensions at locations A, B, C, D, and E are shown below in millimeters for each Backplane Insulation Plate model.
5-dia. holes for mounting
Base Insulation Plate
(4/6 places)
M4 screws for mounting to PC
(4/5 places)
(B)
6
12 dia.
5 dia.
135 (118) 110
C
D
(A)
(E)
10
Insulation Plates for CPU Backplanes
Specifications
p
Dimensions (mm)
Model
For 3 slots
C200H-ATT31
E
261
D
210
C
---
B
---
A
246
For 5 slots
C200H-ATT51
331
280
---
---
316
For 8 slots
C200H-ATT81
436
385
---
---
421
For 10 slots
C200H-ATTA1
506
455
227.5
270.5
491
D
140
C
---
B
---
A
175
Insulation Plates for CPU Backplanes
Specifications
p
Dimensions (mm)
Model
For 3 slots
C200HW-ATT32
E
190
For 5 slots
C200HW-ATT52
260
210
---
---
245
For 8 slots
C200HW-ATT82
365
315
---
---
350
For 10 slots
C200HW-ATTA2
435
385
---
---
420
3-1-5 DIN Track Mounting
The PC may be mounted using DIN track if desired. This type of mounting is not
required, and the PC may be directly mounted to any sturdy support meeting the
environmental specifications (refer to Appendix B Specifications). If you want to
mount the PC on DIN track, you can order a DIN Track from OMRON (refer to
Appendix B Standard Models). DIN Tracks come in the two heights shown
below.
Note Never use DIN Track to mount Backplane in locations subject to vibration.
55
Section 3-1
Installation Environment
DIN Track Mounting Bracket
The DIN Track Mounting Bracket shown below is necessary for mounting the PC
to the DIN Track.
DIN Track
The following DIN Tracks are available.
Model
Specification
PFP-50N
50 cm long, 7.3 mm high
PFP-100N
1 m long, 7.3 mm high
PFP-100N2
1 m long, 16 mm high
Procedure
1, 2, 3...
1. The following diagram is a view of the back of the Backplane. Attach one
Mounting Bracket to the left and right sides of the Backplane as shown
below.
Backplane
DIN Track Mounting
Bracket
There are two Backplane mounting screws each on the left
and right sides of the Backplane. Use these screws to attach
the DIN Track Mounting Brackets to the Backplane.
56
Section 3-1
Installation Environment
2. Mount the Backplane to the DIN Track so that the claws on the Mounting
Brackets fit into the upper portion of the DIN Track as shown below.
This claw fits into the DIN Track
DIN Track
Backplane
DIN Track Mounting Bracket
3. Loosen the screws attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Backplane. Slide
the Backplane upward as shown below so that the Mounting Bracket and
Backplane clamp securely onto the DIN Track. Tighten the screws.
DIN Track Mounting Bracket
DIN Track
Hold-down bracket
Projec- Slide this screw to the top of the
tions
projection and then tighten it.
57
Section 3-1
Installation Environment
3-1-6 Mounting Units to the Backplane
The CPU Unit of the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE has no I/O points built in. In
order to complete the PC it is necessary to mount at least one or more I/O Units
to the Backplane. Mount the I/O Unit to the Backplane by locking the top of the
I/O Unit into the slot on the Backplane and rotating the I/O Unit downwards as
shown in the following diagram.
Hook
Backplane
Lock lever
Press down on the yellow lock lever at the bottom of the slot, press the I/O Unit
firmly into position, and then release the yellow lock lever, making sure the connector on the back of the Unit is properly connected.
(To remove a Unit, hold down the lock lever with an implement such as a screwdriver.)
58
Section 3-1
Installation Environment
CPU Units, I/O Power Supply Units and Slave Units must have the screws on the
bottom tightened with a Phillips screwdriver. The screwdriver must be held at a
slight angle, so be sure to leave enough space below each Rack.
Duct
20 mm min.
Phillips
screwdriver
CPU Unit
Backplane
I/O Power
Supply Unit
Remote
I/O Rack
20 mm min.
Duct
59
Section 3-1
Installation Environment
3-1-7 I/O Connecting Cables
Each Rack must be mounted vertically, that is with the printing on the front panels oriented as it would normally be read. The Racks should be mounted one
above the other with the CPU Rack uppermost as shown below.
The C200HX/HG/HE is approved by Underwriters Laboratories under the condition that, “The device must be mounted vertically for ventilation purposes.”
Connect the CPU Rack to the first Expansion I/O Rack with an I/O Connecting
Cable and then connect each Expansion I/O Rack in order, again using I/O Connecting Cables. Each I/O Connecting Cable can be up to 10 m long, but the sum
total of all cables between the CPU Rack and Expansion I/O Racks must be 12 m
or less.
Firmly connect the I/O Connecting Cables to the connectors on the Backplanes
and tighten the connector screws. An I/O bus error will occur stopping PC operation if any of the I/O Connecting Cables is disconnected. Be sure to connect
these Cables carefully and securely.
This connector is
not used.
Cover is with a cap.
I/O Connecting
Cable
A hole of 53 mm is diameter is required to pass the connectors on the I/O Connecting Cables through. This hole can be reduced to 33 mm by removing the
hood from the connector, but be sure to reassemble the connector properly and
securely, and secure it with the connector screws.
The pull strength of the Cables is 5 kg. Do not allow more than 5 kg of force to be
applied to the Cables.
Note
1. The sum of the length of all I/O Connecting Cables in one PC must be 12 m
or less.
2. Be careful to connect the Cables in the correct locations.
3. Always secure the I/O connection cables with the connector screws.
60
Section 3-1
Installation Environment
3-1-8 Mounting Memory Cassettes
Use the following procedure to mount a Memory Cassette.
! Caution
1, 2, 3...
Be careful to always turn the power off before inserting or removing a Memory
Cassette. If a Memory Cassette is inserted into or removed from the CPU Unit
with the power on, it may cause the CPU Unit to malfunction or cause damage to
the memory.
1. Open the Memory Cassette compartment cover.
2. Press the Memory Cassette firmly to the back to mount it.
3. Close the compartment cover.
61
Section 3-1
Installation Environment
3-1-9 Mounting a Communications Board
! Caution
1, 2, 3...
Be careful to always turn the power off before inserting or removing a Communications Board. If a Communications Board is inserted into or removed from the
CPU Unit with the power on, it may cause the CPU Unit to malfunction, cause
damage to the memory, or cause errors in communications.
1. Open the Memory Cassette compartment cover.
2. Open the Communications Board compartment cover.
3. Slid the Communications Board in on the supports and press it firmly to the
back of the compartment.
62
Wiring
Section 3-2
4. Close the compartment covers.
3-2
Wiring
3-2-1 Power Supply Wiring
AC Power Supply Units
Note
1. Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit before wiring. This
label is to prevent wiring clippings and other foreign matter from entering the
Unit during wiring procedures.
2. After completing the wiring, remove the protective label from the top of the
Unit before starting operation. The Unit will overheat if operated with this
label in place.
C200HW-PA204 or
C200HW-PA204S
Power Supply Unit
Screw (3.5 mm head with
self-raising pressure plate)
1:1 isolation
transformer
AC power
source
Voltage selector
Note
L2/N
24-VDC output
L1
The AC input terminals may
be indicated as L1/N and L2
instead of L2/N and L1 on
some Units. However, there
is no difference in their functions or performance.
L1/N
L2
63
Wiring
Section 3-2
C200HW-PA204R or
C200HW-PA209R
Power Supply Unit
Screw (3.5 mm head with
self-raising pressure plate)
1:1 isolation
transformer
Voltage selector
RUN
OUTPUT
Power
supply
AC power
source
RUN output
AC Power Source
• Supply 100 to 120 or 200 to 240 VAC.
• Keep voltage fluctuations within the specified range
Supply voltage
Allowable voltage fluctuations
100 to 120 VAC
85 to 132 VAC
200 to 240 VAC
170 to 264 VAC
• If one power supply phase of the equipment is grounded, connect the
grounded phase side to the L2/N (or L1/N if so indicated) terminal.
Voltage Selector
Shorted: 100 to 120 VAC
Open: 200 to 240 VAC
Short-circuit the voltage selection terminals with the shorting bracket supplied
as an accessory to select 100 to 120 VAC supply voltage. For 200 to 240 VAC
leave them open.
Isolation Transformer
Noise between the PC and ground can be significantly reduced by connecting a
1-to-1 isolation transformer. Do not ground the secondary coil of the transformer.
Current Consumption
The current consumption will be 120 VA max. (180 VA max. with the C200HWPA209) per Rack, and there will be a surge current of at least 5 times the max.
current when power is turned on.
24-VDC Output
Use these terminals as the power supply for 24-VDC Input Units. Never externally short these terminals; PC operation will stop if these terminals are shorted.
These terminals are available on the C200HW-PA204S only.
Although the 24-VDC output can supply up to 0.8 A, the combined power consumption for both 5 V and 26 V must be 30 W or less, i.e., the capacity of the
24-VDC output will be reduced if the Units mounted to the Rack consume a lot of
current. Refer to Appendix C Unit Current and Power Consumption for the consumption current of each Unit.
64
Wiring
Section 3-2
The output voltage of the 24-VDC output will vary with the current consumption
of the load as shown in the following table. Be sure to check the current consumption and allowable voltage ranges of the devices connected before using
these terminals.
Load current on 24-VDC
output
Accuracy of 24-VDC output
for lot No. 0197 or later
Accuracy of 24-VDC output
for lot No. 3187 or earlier
Less than 0.3 A
+17%
–11%
+10%
–20%
0.3 A or higher
+10%
–11%
Note Lot numbers are as shown in the following diagram.
0 1 9 7
1997 (Rightmost digit of year)
September (Month: 1 to 9 = Jan to Sep, X/Y/Z = Oct/Nov/Dec
01 (Day: 01 to 31)
Connect a dummy load as shown in the following diagram if the maximum operating voltage of the connected device is 26.4 V (24 V +10%).
IL
Dummy
load
R
Connected
device
(Photoelectric
Switch, Sensor Input Unit,
etc.
L
24 VDC
OUTPUT
• Resistance of the dummy load:
R=24/(0.3 – IL) (Ω)
120 Ω when IL= 0.1 A
240 Ω when IL= 0.2 A
Not necessary when IL= 0.3 A
(IL: Total current of connected devices)
• Capacity of the dummy load resistance:
W=(0.3 – IL) x 26.4 x 5 (Safety factor)
30 W (120 Ω) when IL= 0.1 A
15 W (240 Ω) when IL= 0.2 A
Note Since the dummy load will generate heat, be careful not to allow any combustible
materials to come in contact with the resistor.
65
Wiring
Section 3-2
RUN Output
These terminals turn ON whenever the CPU Unit is operating in RUN or MONITOR Mode. Use these terminals under the following specifications These terminals are available on the C200HW-PA204R/PA209R only.
Model
Contact
form
Maximum
switching
capacity
Crimp Terminals
C200HW-PA204R
C200HW-PA209R
SPST-NO
250 VAC: 2 A for resistive loads
240 VAC: 2A for resistive loads
0.5 A for inductive loads 120 VAC: 0.5 A inductive loads
24VDC: 2 A
24 VDC: 2A
The terminals on the Power Supply Unit are M3.5, self-raising terminals with
screws. Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires
directly to terminals. Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 0.8 N S m.
Use round-type crimp terminals (M3.5) having the dimensions shown below.
7 mm max.
! Caution
Note
Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 0.8 N S m. The loose screws
may result in short-circuit, malfunction, or burning.
1. Supply power to all of the Power Supply Units from the same source.
2. Be sure to check the setting of the voltage selector before supplying power.
3. Do not forget to remove the label from the top of the Power Supply Unit
before turn on the power supply.
DC Power Supplies
Note
1. Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit before wiring. This
label is to prevent wiring clippings and other foreign matter from entering the
Unit during wiring procedures.
2. After completing the wiring, remove the protective label from the top of the
Unit before starting operation. The Unit will overheat if operated with this
label in place.
C200HW-PD024
Power Supply Unit
Screw (3.5 mm head with
self-raising pressure plate)
DC power
source
Note To satisfy the EC Directives (Low-voltage
Directives), provide reinforced insulation or
double insulation for the 24-VDC power source
connected to the Power Supply Unit.
66
Wiring
Section 3-2
DC Power Source
Supply 24 VDC. Keep voltage fluctuations within the specified range (19.2 to
28.8 V).
Power Consumption
The power consumption will be 40 W max. per Rack, and there will be a surge
current of at least 5 times the max. power when power is turned on.
Crimp Terminals
The terminals on the Power Supply Unit are M3.5, self-raising terminals with
screws. Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires
directly to terminals. Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 0.8 N S m.
Use crimp terminals (M3.5) having the dimensions shown below.
7 mm max.
7 mm max.
Do not reverse the positive and negative poles when wiring the power supply
terminals.
Supply power to all of the Power Supply Units from the same source.
Do not forget to remove the label from the top of the Power Supply Unit before
turning on the power supply to ensure proper heat dissipation.
For satisfying the EC Directives (Low-voltage Directives), provide reinforced
insulation or double insulation for the DC power supply used for the CPU Unit.
Grounding
Power Supply Unit
L2/N
L1
To avoid electrical shock, attach a grounded (earth ground) AWG 14 wire (crosssectional area of at least 2 mm2) to the GR terminal. The resistance to ground
must be 100 Ω or less. Do not use a wire longer than 20 m. Care must be taken,
because ground resistance is affected by environmental conditions such as soil
composition, water content, time of year, and the length of time since the wire
was laid underground.
The Line Ground (LG) terminal is a noise-filtered neutral terminal that does not
normally require grounding. If electrical noise is a problem, however, this terminal should be connected to the Ground (GR) terminal.
PC operation may be adversely affected if the ground wire is shared with other
equipment, or if the ground wire is attached to the metal structure of a building.
67
Wiring
Section 3-2
When using an Expansion I/O Rack, the Rack must also be grounded to the GR
terminal. The same ground can be used for all connections.
OK
OK
Other
devices
Ground to 100 Ω or less.
Wrong
Other
devices
Other
devices
Ground to 100 Ω or less.
If grounding results in operating errors, insulate the CPU Backplane and all
Expansion I/O Backplanes from the control panel. Refer to Using the Antinoise
Insulating Attachment on page 77 for details.
Crimp Terminals
The terminals on the Power Supply Unit are M3.5, self-raising terminals with
screws. Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires
directly to terminals. Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 0.8 N S m.
Use crimp terminals (M3.5) having the dimensions shown below.
7 mm max.
7 mm max.
3-2-2 Standard I/O Unit Wiring
! Caution
Check the I/O specifications for the I/O Units, and consider the following points.
• Do not apply a voltage that exceeds the input voltage for Input Units or the
maximum switching capacity for Output Units. Doing so may result in breakdown, damage or fire.
• When the power supply has positive and negative terminals, be sure to wire
them correctly.
Note To satisfy the EC Directives (Low-voltage Directives), provide reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power source connected to the DC I/O Unit.
Use a separate power source for the DC I/O Unit from the external power supply
for the Contact Output Unit.
Electric Wires
The following electric wires are recommended.
Electric Wire Size
Terminal Block Connector
10-terminal
AWG 22 to 18 (0.32 to 0.82 mm2)
19-terminal
AWG 22 (0.32 mm2)
Note The allowable current capacity of electric wiring differs depending on factors
such as ambient temperature, insulation thickness, etc., so be sure to take these
factors into account when selecting electric wire.
Crimp Terminals
The terminals on the Power Supply Unit are M3.5, self-raising terminals with
screws. Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires
directly to terminals. Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 0.8 N S m.
Use crimp terminals (M3.5) having the dimensions shown below.
7 mm max.
7 mm max.
For satisfying the EC Directives (Low-voltage Directives), provide reinforced
insulation or double insulation for the DC power supply used for the I/O Units.
68
Wiring
Wiring
Section 3-2
Be sure that each Unit is securely mounted. In order to prevent wire scraps and
other objects from getting inside of the Unit, keep the top-surface label on while
wiring the Unit. After the wiring has been completed, be sure to remove the label
in order to allow heat radiation.
During wiring
After wiring
Remove the label.
Wire the Units so that they can be easily replaced. In addition, make sure that the
I/O indicators are not covered by the wiring.
Do not place the wiring for I/O Units together or in the same duct as power lines.
Inductive noise can cause errors in operation.
Tighten the terminal screws to the torque of 0.8 N S m.
The terminals have screws with 3.5-mm diameter heads and self-raising pressure plates. Connect the lead wires to the terminals as shown below.
Terminal Blocks
Unlock the terminal block of an I/O Unit to remove the terminal block from the I/O
Unit. You do not have to remove the lead wires from the terminal block in order to
remove it from an I/O Unit.
Locks for terminal block.
Unlock to remove the terminal
block from the I/O Unit. Make
sure the terminal block is
locked securely after wiring is
complete.
69
Wiring
I/O Unit Covers
Section 3-2
A C200H-COV11 Cover is provided as an I/O Unit cover for Units that use 10P
terminal block connectors. After the I/O wiring has been completed, slide the
cover up from the bottom, as shown in the illustration below. These Covers
should be applied whenever the extra protection is required.
Attach
Remove
I/O Unit cover
Input Devices
Observe the following information when selecting or connecting input devices.
DC Input Units
The following types of DC input devices can be connected.
Contact output
IN
DC Input Unit
COM
NPN open-collector output
+
Sensor
Power
Supply
IN
Output
7 mA
DC Input Unit
COM
0V
NPN current output
+
Current
regulator
IN
Output
7 mA
0V
Sensor
Power
Supply
DC Input Unit
COM
PNP current output
+
Output
7 mA
0V
70
Sensor
Power
Supply
IN
COM
AC/DC Input Unit
Wiring
Section 3-2
The circuit below should be used for I/O devices having a voltage output.
Voltage output
+
COM
Output
0V
IN
DC Input Unit
Sensor
Power
Supply
The circuit below should NOT be used for I/O devices having a voltage output.
Voltage output
+
Output
Sensor
Power
Supply
IN
0V
DC Input Unit
COM
AC Input Units
Contact output
IN
AC Input Unit
COM
AC Switching
IN
Proximity
switch
main
circuit
AC Input Unit
COM
Note When using Reed switch as the input contact for an AC Input Unit, keep the
allowable current to 1 A or greater. If Reed switches with smaller allowable currents are used, the contacts may fuse due to surge currents.
Input Leakage Current
When two-wire sensors, such as photoelectric sensors, proximity sensors, or
limit switches with LEDs, are used, the input bit may be turned ON erroneously
by leakage current. In order to prevent this, connect a bleeder resistor across the
input as shown below.
Input
power
supply
Bleeder
resistor
R
PC
Sensor
If the leakage current is less than 1.3 mA, there should be no problem. If the leakage current is greater than 1.3 mA, determine the resistance (R) and power rating (W) for the bleeder resistor using the following formulas.
71
Wiring
Section 3-2
For standard I/O Units:
I = leakage current in mA
7.2
kΩ max.
R = ––––––
2.4 x I – 3
2.3
W = ––– W min.
R
The previous calculations are based on the following equations.
R
I
W w
R )
Input voltge (24)
Input current (10)
Input voltage (24)
Input current (10)
Input voltage (24)
R
v OFF voltage (3)
Input voltage (24)
Tolerance (4)
When using a two-wire sensor with a 12-VDC or 24-VDC input device, check
that the following conditions have been met. Failure to meet these conditions
may result in operating errors.
Precautions when
Connecting a Two-wire
DC Sensor
1, 2, 3...
1. Relation between voltage when the PC is ON and the sensor residual voltage:
VON x VCC – VR
2. Relation between voltage when the PC is ON and sensor control output
(load current):
IOUT (min) x ION x IOUT (max.)
ION = (VCC – VR – 1.5 [PC internal residual voltage])/RIN
When ION is smaller than IOUT (min), connect a bleeder resistor R. The
bleeder resistor constant can be calculated as follows:
R x (VCC – VR)/(IOUT (min.) – ION)
Power W y (VCC – VR)2/R × 4 [allowable margin]
Note The residual voltage in the PC is 4.0 V for the following Units:
C200H-ID211/ID212/IM211/IM212/INT01
The residual voltage is 1.5 V for all other Units.
72
Wiring
Section 3-2
3. Relation between current when the PC is OFF and sensor leakage current:
IOFF y Ileak
Refer to Input Leakage Current later in this section for details.
The IOFF values differ for each Unit, but is always 1.3 mA for Input Units
whose OFF current specifications are not given.
DC Input Unit
Two-wire sensor
RIN
R
VR
VCC
VR:
VCC: Power voltage
VON: PC ON voltage
Sensor output residual current
IOUT: Sensor control current (load current)
ION: PC ON current
Ileak: Sensor leakage current
IOFF: PC OFF current
RIN: PC input impedance
R:
Bleeder resistance
Output Circuits
Output Short-circuit
Protection
If a load connected to the output terminals is short-circuited, output elements
and printed boards may be damaged. To guard against this, incorporate a
fuse in the external circuit.
Transistor Output Residual
Voltage
When connecting TTL circuits to transistor Output Units, it is necessary to connect a pull-up resistor and a CMOS IC between the two. This is because of the
residual voltage left on the transistor output after the output turns OFF.
Output Leakage Current
If there is a possibility of leakage current causing a transistor or triac to malfunction, connect a bleeder resistor across the output as shown below.
OUT
L
R
Load power supply
PC
Bleeder resistor
COM
Determine the value and rating for the bleeder resistor using the following formula.
R
VON
–––
I
Where
VON = ON voltage of the load in V
I = leakage current in mA
R = bleeder resistance in kΩ
73
Wiring
Output Surge Current
Section 3-2
When connecting a transistor or triac Output Unit to an output device having a
high surge current (such as an incandescent lamp), care must be taken to avoid
damage to the Output Unit. The transistor and triac Output Units are capable of
withstanding a surge current of ten times the rated current. If the surge current
for a particular device exceeds this amount, use the circuit shown below to protect the Output Unit.
L
OUT
+
PC
R
COM
Another way of protecting the Output Unit lets the load draw a small current
(about one third the rated current) while the output is OFF, significantly reducing
the surge current. This circuit (shown below) not only reduces the surge current,
but also reduces the voltage across the load at the same time.
R
L
OUT
+
PC
COM
3-2-3 Electrical Noise
I/O Signal Lines
Whenever possible, place I/O signal lines and power lines in separate ducts or
tubes. If placing them together cannot be avoided, use shielded cable to minimize the effects, and connect the shielded end to the GR terminal.
1 = I/O cables
2 = Power cables
Suspended duct
74
In-floor duct
Conduits
Wiring
Section 3-2
Inductive Load Surge Suppressor
When an inductive load is connected to an I/O Unit, it is necessary to connect a
surge suppressor or diode in parallel with the load as shown below. This is so
that the back EMF generated by the load will be absorbed.
IN
L
Diode
DC input
COM
L
OUT
Contact Output Unit
Triac Output Unit
Surge suppressor
COM
OUT
L
+
Contact Output Unit
Transistor Output Unit
Diode
COM
Note Use surge suppressors and diodes with the following specifications.
Surge Suppressor
Resistance:
50 Ω
Capacitor:
0.47 µF
Voltage:
200 V
Diode
Leading-edge peak inverse voltage:
Average rectified current:
At least 3 times load voltage
1A
75
Wiring
Section 3-2
External Wiring
If power cables must be run alongside the I/O wiring (that is, in parallel with it), at
least 300 mm must be left between the power cables and the I/O wiring as shown
below.
Low current cable
1
300 mm min.
Control cable
2
Power cable
300 mm min.
3
Class-3 ground
Where:
1 = I/O wiring
2 = General control wiring
3 = Power cables
If the I/O wiring and power cables must be placed in the same duct (for example,
where they are connected to the equipment), they must be shielded from each
other using grounded metal plates.
Metal plate (iron)
200 mm min.
1
2
3
Class-3 ground
Where:
1 = I/O wiring
2 = General control wiring
3 = Power cables
Interlock Circuits
When the PC controls an operation such as the clockwise and counterclockwise operation of a motor, provide an external interlock such as the one
shown below to prevent both the forward and reverse outputs from turning
ON at the same time.
Interlock circuit
00501
MC2
MC1 Motor clockwise
PC
00502
76
MC1
MC2 Motor counterclockwise
Wiring
Section 3-2
This circuit prevents outputs MC1 and MC2 from ever both being ON at the same
time. Even if the PC is programmed improperly or malfunctions, the motor is protected.
Using the Antinoise Insulating Attachment
When using the C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit near a power supply system,
unwanted current paths may cause operating errors. If this occurs, use an Antinoise Insulating Attachment. If this Attachment is connected to the CPU Backplane and all Expansion I/O Backplanes, the PC will be insulated from the control panel. This will prevent external noise from entering the PC.
Antinoise Insulating Attachments must be purchased separately using the following model number.
Model
C200HW-ATT01
Quantity
Four attachments included
7.8 dia.
Dimensions (Unit: mm)
Insulating Method for Backplanes
As shown in the following diagram, connect the Attachments to the control panel
first (four locations) and then tighten the screws. The recommended tightening
torque is 1.2 N S m.
Control panel
Attachment
Screw
Backplane
Precautions
• Always attach the Attachments as shown above.
• When the Attachments are used to mount the Backplanes, the height of the
Rack will be increased by approximate 10 mm. Confirm that the front of the
Units, cables, or other parts of the PC do not come into contact with other
devices.
• If the installation environment is subject to noise, then noise can also enter on
the power supply line. If necessary, use noise filters or insulating transformers
to remove noise from the power supply line.
Power Interruptions
A sequential circuit is built into the PC to handle power interruptions. This circuit
prevents malfunctions due to momentary power loss or voltage drops. A timing
diagram for the operation of this circuit is shown below.
The PC ignores all momentary power failures if the interruption lasts no longer
than 10 ms (no longer than 2 ms for a DC Power Supply). If the interruption lasts
77
Wiring
Section 3-2
between 10 and 25 ms (between 2 and 5 ms for a DC Power Supply), the interruption may or may not be detected. If the supply voltage drops below 85% of the
rated voltage for longer that 25 ms (less for the DC Power Supply), the PC will
stop operating and the external outputs will be automatically turned OFF.
Operation is resumed automatically when the voltage is restored to more than
85% of the rated value. The diagram below shows the timing of PC operation
and stopping during a power interruption. The time it takes to detect the power
failure is shorter when the power supply is DC. Also, the voltage value for which
the C200HX/HG/HE will stop due to a drop in the power supply voltage will be
lower than that for AC.
Power
interrupted
Power
restored
Power supply
Power failure detection signal
+5 V
CPU Unit operating voltage
Power supply reset
78
Time lapse until
detection
SECTION 4
Programming Console Operation
This section describes the function of the Programming Console and its connection methods.
4-1
4-2
Using the Programming Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-1 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-2 Connecting the Programming Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Initial Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
80
80
81
82
79
Section 4-1
Using the Programming Console
4-1
Using the Programming Console
4-1-1 Nomenclature
The front panel of the Programming Console is shown below, taking the
C200H-PRO27-E as an example.
C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console
LCD area
Mode selector switch
Instruction keys
Numeric keys
Cassette jacks
Operation keys
LCD Area
This window displays the program contents and monitor status.
Mode Selector Switch
PROGRAM MODE:
RUN MODE:
MONITOR MODE:
Keys
Instruction, numeric, and operation keys are used for inputting the program and
data.
Note
Used for creating programs.
Used for executing the programs.
Used for monitoring PC status.
1. The operations of C200H-PRO27-E and CQM1-PRO01-E Programming
Consoles are the same.
2. The following keys look different but have the same functions.
AR
HR
SET
RESET
80
HR
PLAY
SET
REC
RESET
Section 4-1
Using the Programming Console
4-1-2 Connecting the Programming Console
There are two Programming Console models that can be used with the C200HX/
C200HG/C200HE: the C200H-PRO27-E and the CQM1-PRO01-E. The following illustration shows how a Programming Console (a C200H-PRO27-E in this
case) connects to the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE CPU Unit.
C200H-CN222 or C200H-CN422
Connecting Cable
C200H-PRO27-E
Programming Console
As indicated in the illustration, the C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console
connects to the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE CPU Unit with C200H-CN222 (2 m)
or C200H-CN422 (4 m) Connecting Cable, which must be purchased separately.
The CQM1-PRO01-E Programming Console comes with 2 m of Connecting
Cable.
81
Checking Initial Operation
4-2
Section 4-2
Checking Initial Operation
After the Programming Console has been connected, it can be used to check
initial C200HX/C200HG/C200HE operation. Make sure that the Programming
Console is properly connected and that the correct power supply is being provided, and then follow the procedure outlined below.
1, 2, 3...
1. Check to be sure that the Programming Console is in PROGRAM mode.
MONITOR
RUN
PROGRAM
2. Turn on the power to the PC and check the CPU Unit indicators. The green
POWER indicator should light.
3. Check the Programming Console display and input the password (Clear
and then Monitor Keys). If operation is normal, the display should appear as
shown below.
<PROGRAM>
PASSWORD
<PROGRAM>
BZ
Indicates the mode set by the mode selector switch.
Note If the mode is not indicated, turn off and restart the power supply.
4. After checking PC operation, turn off the power. If operation is not normal,
refer to 5-1 Troubleshooting.
82
SECTION 5
Troubleshooting, Inspections, and Maintenance
The C200HX/C200HG/C200HE provides self-diagnostic functions to identify many types of abnormal system conditions.
These functions minimize downtime and enable quick, smooth error correction.
This section provides information on hardware and software errors that occur during PC operation. It also provides inspection
and maintenance information that can be used to help prevent the occurrence of errors.
5-1
5-2
5-3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-1 Replacing Output Unit Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-2 Replacing Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-3 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
87
87
88
91
92
83
Section 5-1
Troubleshooting
5-1
Troubleshooting
CPU Racks and Expansion I/O Racks
Error
POWER indicator does not light.
Probable cause
Possible correction
The voltage selector terminal setting is Correct the voltage selector terminal
wrong. (A 100-VAC voltage is used
setting.
when set to 200 VAC.)
The 24-V output terminals are
externally shorted.
An internal fuse has blown.
Correct the wiring.
Replace the Power Supply Unit.
The Power Supply Unit is broken. (A
200-VAC voltage was used when set
to 100 VAC.)
RUN indicator does not light.
RUN indicator is lit, but RUN output
does not turn on.
Relays do not operate from a
particular number onwards.
Outputs (or inputs) turn ON for
particular Relay numbers.
All the bits from a particular Unit turn
ON.
84
There is a short-circuit in the internal
power supply. (There is a short-circuit
in the 5/26-VDC supplied by the
Power Supply Unit in a Unit on the
Rack.)
Replace the Unit with the short-circuit.
The program has an error (no END
instruction).
A power supply line is defective.
Special I/O Units are assigned
overlapping unit numbers.
A Slave Unit’s power supply is turned
off, or no Unit is set as the terminator.
The power circuit is defective.
Correct the program.
The I/O bus is defective.
Replace the Backplane.
Replace the CPU Unit.
Correct the unit number assignments.
Turn on the power to the Slave Unit,
or set a Unit as the terminator.
Replace the CPU Unit.
Section 5-1
Troubleshooting
Input Units
Error
Indicator lights are turned off, and no
inputs
pu s turn
u ON.
O
Indicator lights are turned ON, but no
inputs turn ON.
All inputs remain ON, and will not turn
OFF.
Inputs
do not turn ON for p
particular
p
R l numbers.
b
Relay
Inputs
p
do not turn OFF for particular
p
R l numbers.
Relay
b
Inputs
p
are turning
g ON and OFF
i
irregularly.
l l
Malfunctioning
groups
g Relays
y are in g
p of
i h
eight.
Operation is normal, but the input
indicator does not light.
Probable cause
Possible correction
No external input power supply is
provided.
The external input voltage is low.
Terminal screws are loose.
Terminal block connectors are making
poor contact.
The input circuit is defective.
Provide a power supply.
The input circuit is defective.
Replace the Unit.
An input device is defective.
Input wiring is disconnected.
Terminal screws are loose.
Terminal block connectors are making
poor contact.
The ON time for external inputs is too
short.
The input circuit is defective.
An input bit address is used for an
OUT instruction in the program.
The input circuit is defective.
An input bit address is used for an
OUT instruction in the program.
The external input voltage is low.
There is malfunctioning due to noise.
Replace the input device.
Check the input wiring.
Tighten the terminal screws.
Securely lock the connectors, or
replace them if necessary.
Adjust the input device.
Terminal screws are loose.
Terminal block connectors are making
poor contact.
Common terminal screws are loose.
Terminal block connectors are making
poor contact.
The CPU Unit is defective.
The LED is defective.
Supply the rated voltage.
Tighten the terminal screws.
Securely lock the connectors, or
replace them if necessary.
Replace the Unit.
Replace the Unit.
Correct the program.
Replace the Unit.
Correct the program.
Supply the rated voltage.
Apply noise countermeasures such as
installing a surge suppressor,
installing an isolation transformer, and
using shielded cables.
Tighten the terminal screws.
Securely lock the connectors, or
replace them if necessary.
Tighten the terminal screws.
Securely lock the connectors, or
replace them if necessary.
Replace the CPU Unit.
Replace the Unit.
85
Section 5-1
Troubleshooting
Output Units
Error
No outputs
p
turn ON.
Outputs all fail to turn OFF.
Indicators do not light,
g , and the outputs
p
f particular
for
i l Relay
R l numbers
b
do
d not
turn ON.
ON
Indicators light,
g , but the outputs
p
for
particular
i l R
Relay
l numbers
b
d
do not turn
ON
ON.
Indicator lights
are off,, but the outputs
g
p
f particular
i l Relay
R l numbers
b
d not
for
do
turn OFF.
Indicators light,
g , and the outputs
p
for
particular
i l R
Relay
l numbers
b
d
do not turn
OFF.
Outputs
p
are turning
g ON and OFF
i
irregularly.
l l
Malfunctioning
groups
g Relays
y are in g
p of
i h
eight.
Operation is normal, but the output
indicator does not light.
86
Probable cause
Possible correction
A load power supply is not provided.
The load power supply voltage is low.
Terminal screws are loose.
Terminal block connectors are making
poor contact.
A fuse is blown.
I/O bus connectors are making poor
contact.
The output circuit is defective.
The output circuit is defective.
Provide the power supply.
Provide the rated voltage.
Tighten the terminal screws.
Securely lock the connectors, or
replace them if necessary.
Replace the fuse.
Replace the Unit.
The output ON time is too short.
The output circuit is defective.
The program’s OUT instruction bit
addresses overlap.
An output device is defective.
Output wiring is disconnected.
Terminal screws are loose.
Terminal block connectors are making
poor contact.
Output Relays are defective.
The output circuit is defective.
Output Relays are defective.
There is faulty restoration due to
leakage current or residual current.
The output circuit is defective.
The program’s OUT instruction bit
addresses overlap.
The load power supply voltage is low.
The program’s OUT instruction bit
addresses overlap.
There is malfunctioning due to noise.
Correct the program.
Replace the Unit.
Correct the program.
Terminal screws are loose.
Terminal block connectors are making
poor contact.
Common terminal screws are loose.
Terminal block connectors are making
poor contact.
A fuse is blown.
The CPU Unit is defective.
The LED is defective.
Tighten the terminal screws.
Securely lock the connectors, or
replace them if necessary.
Tighten the terminal screws.
Securely lock the connectors, or
replace them if necessary.
Replace the fuse.
Replace the CPU Unit.
Replace the Unit.
Replace the Unit.
Replace the Unit.
Replace the output device.
Check the output wiring.
Tighten the terminal screws.
Securely lock the connectors, or
replace them if necessary.
Replace the Relays.
Replace the Unit.
Replace the Relays.
Replace the external load or add a
dummy resistor.
Replace the Unit.
Correct the program.
Supply the rated voltage.
Correct the program.
Apply noise countermeasures such as
installing a surge suppressor,
installing an isolation transformer,
using shielded cables, or attaching the
Insulating Attachments.
Inspection and Maintenance
5-2
Section 5-2
Inspection and Maintenance
5-2-1 Replacing Output Unit Fuses
The following Output Units each contain one fuse. Replace the fuse if the fuse
indicator lights. The OD211, OD212, OA222, and OA224 Output Units do not
have fuse indicators. Replace the fuses on these Units if outputs are not produced.
Unit
Fuse indicator
Capacity
(20 mm long x 5.2 mm dia.)
125 V,, 5 A
C200H-OD411
C200H-OD211
C200H-OD212
C200H-OD213
C200H-OA221
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
C200H-OA222V
No
250 V, 3 A
C200H-OA223
Yes
250 V, 5 A
C200H-OA224
No
250 V, 3.15 A
125 V,, 8 A
250 V, 5 A
The OD411, OD213, OA221 and OA223 Output Units also provide an external
output bit that can be used to check the condition of the fuse. If bit 08 of the word
allocated to the Unit is ON, the fuse is burnt out.
To replace a fuse, follow the steps below. Use only UL/CSA certified replacement fuses.
1, 2, 3...
1. Turn OFF the power to the PC.
2. Detach the terminal block by unlocking the lock levers at the top and bottom
of the terminal block.
3. While pushing down the lock lever on the Backplane with a screwdriver as
shown below, remove the Output Unit.
Lock lever
87
Inspection and Maintenance
Section 5-2
4. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the screw from the top of the Unit.
5. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, detach the case from the Unit.
(4)
(5)
6. Pull out the printed circuit board.
7. Insert a new fuse. A spare fuse is provided inside the rear of the case when
the Unit is delivered.
Rear of the case
Spare fuse
8. Reassemble in reverse order of assembly.
Note
1. Use UL or CSA approved fuses if the UL or CSA standards must be satisfied. For further details, consult the fuse manufacturer.
2. Fuses in High-density I/O Units cannot be replaced by the user. Refer to
your OMRON dealer for service.
5-2-2 Replacing Relays
Replacement Relay
The following Output Units provide relay sockets that allow the Relays to be
replaced if they should go bad. Use the Relay listed in the table.
Output Unit
C200H-OC221
C200H-OC222
C200H-OC223
C200H-OC224
C200H-OC225
C200H-OC222V
C200H-OC224V
Relay
G6B-1174P-FD-US
24 VDC
G6R-1, 24 VDC
C200H-OC226
Use the following procedure to replace a Relay.
Note The relays on the C200H-OC222N, C200H-OC224V, and C200H-OC226 cannot be replaced.
1, 2, 3...
1. Turn OFF the power to the PC.
2. Detach the terminal block by unlocking the lock levers at the top and bottom
of the terminal block.
88
Inspection and Maintenance
Section 5-2
3. While pushing down the lock lever on the Backplane with a screwdriver as
shown below, remove the Output Unit.
Lock lever
4. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the screw from the top of the Unit.
5. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, detach the case from the Unit.
(4)
(5)
6. Pull out the printed circuit board. The Relays are placed on the PC boards of
individual Units as shown in the figures below.
7. A Relay puller is provided inside the rear of the case when the Unit is delivered. Use the Relay puller to pull out the Relay as shown below. Insert a new
Relay.
Relays for the C200H-OC222V/OC224V/OC226V can be replaced without
using the Relay puller.
Relay puller
Using the Relay puller,
pull the Relay up and out
of the socket.
Printed circuit board
8. Reassemble in reverse order of assembly.
89
Inspection and Maintenance
! Caution
Section 5-2
Check the pin arrangement before inserting a new Relay into the socket. Pins
can only be inserted one way, so do not try to force them if they do not go in easily.
Applying too much force can bend the pins and render them unusable.
OC221/OC224
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OC222
0
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
5
7
9
11
OC223
0
1
2
3
4
OC225
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
6
9
8
11 10
13 12
15 14
OC222V
0
2
4
6
90
1
3
5
7
8
9
10
11
Inspection and Maintenance
Section 5-2
OC224V
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OC226
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
Note The relays on the C200H-OC222N, C200H-OC224V, and C200H-OC226 cannot be replaced.
5-2-3 Batteries
!
DANGER
Batteries can burn, explode, or leak. Absolutely do not short-circuit across the
terminals, attempt to recharge batteries, or take them apart, heat them, or
expose them to fire.
When the battery is nearly discharged, the ERR indicator will flash and the message “BATT FAIL” will appear on the Programming Console. When this occurs,
replace the battery within one week to avoid loss of data.
The normal battery service life is five years at 25°C. The service life will be
shorten if used at higher temperatures.
The Battery Fail Flag is allocated to 25308 for the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE.
The battery comes together with its connector as a set. To replace the Battery
Set (C200H-BAT09), follow the steps below. The entire replacement must be
completed within five minutes to ensure that the data will not be lost.
1, 2, 3...
1. Turn OFF the power to the PC. (If the power was not already ON, turn the
power ON for at least one minute before turning the power OFF.)
2. Remove the cover from the battery compartment of the CPU Unit.
3. Remove the old Battery Set.
4. Install the new Battery Set as shown in the following diagram.
91
Inspections
Section 5-3
5. Replace the cover of the battery compartment.
6. Press CLR, FUN, MONTR, MONTR or just turn the power to the PC OFF
and then ON again to clear the error message on the Programming Console.
5-3
Inspections
Daily and periodic inspections are required to keep PCs working in top condition.
PC are constructed out of semiconductor components, which although have an
extremely long life time, can deteriorate under improper environmental conditions. Periodic inspections are thus required to ensure that the required conditions are being kept.
Inspection is recommended at least once every six months to a year, but more
frequent inspections will be necessary in adverse environments.
Take immediate steps to correct the situation if any of the conditions in the following table are not met.
No.
Item
Contents
Criteria
Remarks
1
Main power
supply
Check the voltage fluctuations at
the power supply terminals.
The voltage must be within the
allowable voltage fluctuation (see
following table)
Voltage tester
2
Ambient
e
o e
environment
Measure the temperature inside
the control panel.
Measure the humidity inside the
control panel.
Check for dirt and dust.
Temperature must be 0 to 55 _C.
Thermometer
Humidity must be 35% to 85%.
Humidity meter
Visual
Check the voltage fluctuations at
the I/O terminals.
Check the mounting of all Units.
There must be no collection of dirt
and dust.
Voltages must be within
specifications for each Unit.
The Units must be firmly mounted.
Check all cable connections.
The cables must be firmly connected.
Check all external wiring screws.
Check all external wiring cables.
The screws must be firmly tightened.
The cables must not be damaged in
any way.
Electrical life
3
4
5
I/O power
supply
Installation
Consumable
parts
Contact output Relays:
G6B-1174P-FD-US
24 VDC
Battery: C200H-BAT09
Voltage Fluctuation
Handling Precautions
92
Voltage tester
Phillips
screwdriver
Phillips
screwdriver
Visual
Visual
---
Resistive loads: 300,000 operations
Inductive loads: 100,000 operations
Mechanical life: 50 million operations
Expected life: 5 yrs at 25 _C
Power supply voltage
---
Allowable voltage fluctuation
100 to 120 VAC
85 to 132 VAC
200 to 240 VAC
170 to 264 VAC
24 VDC
19.2 to 28.8 VDC
• Always turn off the power supply before replacing a Unit.
• After replacing a faulty Unit, check the new Unit to make sure that the same
problem does not appear again.
• When returning a Unit for repairs, provide as many details about the problem
as possible in writing and attach it to the Unit before delivering it to your
OMRON representative. (See inside back cover for regional offices.)
• To clean bad contacts, use a clean cotton cloth soaked in industrial alcohol and
be sure to remove any threads from the cloth before mounting the Unit.
Inspections
Inspection Tools
Section 5-3
• Required Tools
• Screwdrivers (flat-blade and Phillips)
• Voltage tester (analog or digital)
• Industrial alcohol and a clean cotton cloth
• Tools Required in Special Cases
• Synchroscope
• Oscilloscope with pen plotter
• Thermometer and humidity meter
93
Appendix A
Standard Models
CPU Rack
Name
CPU Units ((All models are p
provided
id d with
i h clock
l k function
f
i and
d slots
l
for communications except
CPU11-E/ZE.)
Specifications
UM
3.2K words
7.2K words
EM
None
I/O points
640
880
15.2K words
6K words
(1 b
bank)
k)
880
48K words
(8 banks)
1,184
RS-232C
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
96K words
(16 banks)
1,184
Yes
1,184
31.2K words
18K words
b k )
(3 banks)
880
1,184
,
63.2K words
Power Supply Units
Model number
Power supply voltage:
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (selectable)
--C200HE-CPU11-E/ZE
C200HE-CPU32-E/ZE
C200HE-CPU42-E/ZE
C200HG-CPU33-E/ZE
C200HG-CPU43-E/ZE
C200HG-CPU53-E/ZE
C200HG-CPU63-E/ZE
C200HX-CPU34-E/ZE
C200HX-CPU44-E/ZE
C200HX-CPU54-E/ZE
C200HX-CPU64-E/ZE
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
C200HW-PA204
Output: 4.6 A at 5 V, 0.6 A at 26 V
Power supply voltage:
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (selectable)
C200HW-PA204S
Output: 4.6 A at 5 V, 0.6 A at 26 V
External output:
Output terminals, 0.8 A at 24 VDC
Power supply voltage:
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (selectable)
C200HW-PA204R
Output: 4.6 A at 5 V, 0.6 A at 26 V
RUN output (SPST-NO contact):
Switching capacity: 2 A for resistive loads/0.5 A
for inductive loads at 250 VAC; 2 A at 24 VDC
See page 23 for CPU Unit and Backplane restrictions.
Power supply voltage:
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (selectable)
C200HW-PA209R
Output: 9.0 A at 5 V, 0.6 A at 26 V
RUN output (SPST-NO contact):
Switching capacity: 2 A for resistive loads at 240
VAC; 0.5 A for inductive loads at 120 VAC; 2 A
at 24 VDC
See page 23 for CPU Unit and Backplane restrictions.
Power supply voltage:
24 VDC
C200HW-PD024
Output: 4.6 A at 5 V, 0.6 A at 26 V
95
Appendix A
Standard Models
Name
CPU Backplanes
p
Specifications
Model number
3 slots
C200HW-BC031
5 slots
C200HW-BC051
8 slots (see note)
C200HW-BC081-V1
10 slots (see note)
C200HW-BC101-V1
Note There are restrictions in combining Backplanes and Power Supply Units
when using the C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit with an 8-slot or 10-slot
CPU Backplane or Expansion I/O Backplane.
Name
Memory
y Cassettes
Communication Boards (See
note.))
PC Card Unit
Controller Link Unit
Specifications
Model number
EEPROM
4K words
8K words
16K words
32K words
64K words (see note)
EPROM
16K words/32K words
Equivalent to 27256, 150 ns, 12.5 V
Equivalent to 27512, 150 ns, 12.5 V
Communications port for SYSMAC LINK and SYSMAC
NET Link Units
C200HW-ME04K
C200HW-ME08K
C200HW-ME16K
C200HW-ME32K
C200HW-ME64K
C200HS-MP16K
ROM-JD-B
ROM-KD-B
C200HW-COM01
RS-232C port
RS-422/485 port
Communications port for the SYSMAC LINK Unit and
SYSMAC NET Link Unit and a protocol macro function
C200HW-COM02-V1
C200HW-COM03-V1
C200HW-COM04-EV1
Two RS-232C ports and a protocol macro function
RS-422/485 port, an RS-232C port, and a protocol macro
function
C200HW-COM05-EV1
C200HW-COM06-EV1
Two interface slots for PMCIA2 PC cards.
C200HW-PCU01
Ethernet expansion function included
C200HW-PCS01-EV1
A separate Bus Connection Unit is required.
C200HW-CLK21
Note: Use the V1 Communications Boards for the C200HZ/HG/HE-CPUjj-ZE CPU Units. The C200HWCOM01 can also be used.
96
Appendix A
Standard Models
Expansion I/O Racks
Name
Power Supply
pp y Units
I/O Backplanes
I/O Connecting
g Cables
Specifications
Model number
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (with 24-VDC output terminals)
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC
24 VDC
3 slots
C200HW-PA204
C200HW-PA204S
C200HW-PA204R
C200HW-PA209R
C200HW-PD024
C200HW-BI031
5 slots
C200HW-BI051
8 slots
C200HW-BI081-V1
10 slots
C200HW-BI101-V1
30 cm
70 cm
2m
5m
10 m
The total length
g of the I/O Connecting
g Cables
used
d in
i a networkk must be
b 12 m maximum.
i
C200H-CN311
C200H-CN711
C200H-CN221
C200H-CN521
C200H-CN131
Slave Racks
Slave
Racks
Name
Remote I/O Slave
Units
Specifications
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (switchable)
APF/PCF
24 VDC
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (switchable)
I/O Blocks
I/O
T
i l
Terminals
AC input
DC input
Output
Model number
C200H-RT001-P
C200H-RT002-P
Wired
C200H-RT201
24 VDC
C200H-RT202
Input
Specify either 12 or 24 VDC.
Output
Specify either 100 or 200 VAC.
Specify either 12 or 24 VDC.
Specify either 12 or 24 VDC.
G71-IC16
G71-OD16
G7TC-IA16
G7TC-ID16
G7TC-OC16
97
Appendix A
Standard Models
I/O Units
Name
Input Units
AC Input Units
100 to 120 VAC
C200H-IA121
16 pts
100 to 120 VAC
C200H-IA122/IA122V
8 pts
200 to 240 VAC
C200H-IA221
16 pts
200 to 240 VAC
C200H-IA222/IA222V
8 pts
12 to 24 VDC
C200H-ID211
16 pts
24 VDC
C200H-ID212
8 pts
12 to 24 VAC/DC
C200H-IM211
16 pts
24 VAC/DC
C200H-IM212
Interrupt Input Unit
(see note)
8 pts
12 to 24 VDC
C200HS-INT01
Relay Output Units
8 pts
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (for resistive loads)
C200H-OC221
12 pts
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (for resistive loads)
C200H-OC222/OC222N
5 pts
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (for resistive loads)
Independent commons
C200H-OC223
8 pts
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (for resistive loads)
Independent commons
C200H-OC224/OC224N
16 pts
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (for resistive loads)
(see note)
C200H-OC225/OC226N
8 pts
1 A, 120 VAC
C200H-OA121-E
8 pts
1 A, 200 VAC
C200H-OA221
12 pts
0.3 A, 200 VAC
C200H-OA222V
8 pts
1.2 A, 250 VAC
C200H-OA223
12 pts
0.5 A, 250 VAC
C200H-OA224
8 pts
1 A, 12 to 48 VDC
C200H-OD411
12 pts
0.3 A, 24 VDC
C200H-OD211
16 pts
0.3 A, 24 VDC (see note)
C200H-OD212
8 pts
2.1 A, 24 VDC
C200H-OD213
8 pts
0.8 A, 24 VDC; source type (PNP); w/load
short protection
C200H-OD214
8 pts
0.3 A, 5 to 24 VDC; source type (PNP)
C200H-OD216
12 pts
0.3 A, 5 to 24 VDC; source type (PNP)
C200H-OD217
16 pts
1.0 A, 24 VDC; source type (PNP); with load C200H-OD21A
short protection
4 timers
0.1 to 1 s/1 to 10 s/10 to 60 s/1 min to 10
min (switchable)
AC/DC Input Units
Triac Output Units
Transistor Output
Units
Analog Timer Unit
Variable
Resistor
Connector
98
Model number
8 pts
DC Input Units
Output
Units
Specifications
Connector w/lead wire (2 m) for 1 external resistor
C200H-TM001
C4K-CN223
Appendix A
Standard Models
Name
B7A Interface Units
Specifications
Model number
15 or 16
input pts
Connects to B7A Link Terminals. Standard
transmission delay.
C200H-B7AI1
16
output
pts
Connects to B7A Link Terminals. Standard
transmission delay.
C200H-B7AO1 (see
note)
Note 1. If the Interrupt Input Unit is mounted on an Expansion I/O Rack, the interrupt function cannot be used
and the Interrupt Input Unit will be treated as an ordinary 8-point Input Unit. Moreover, Interrupt Input
Units cannot be used on Slave Racks. In addition, Interrupt Input Units require that a version 2 (i.e., model numbers with a “-V2” suffix) Backplane be used at the CPU Rack. If an earlier version Backplane is
mounted, the interrupt function cannot be used. When mounting the C200H-OC225, C200H-OD212, or
C200H-B7AO1 to a Backplane, make sure that the model number of the Backplane includes the suffix
“-V1” or “-Vj.” The C200H-OC225, C200H-OD212, or C200H-B7AO1 cannot be mounted to any Backplane the model number of which does not include the suffix “-V1” or “-Vj.”
2. The C200H-OC225 can overheat if more than 8 outputs are turned ON simultaneously.
Group-2 I/O Units
Name
DC Input Units
Transistor Output
Units
B7A Interface Units
Specifications
Model number
64 pts
12 VDC
C200H-ID111
32 pts
24 VDC
C200H-ID216
64 pts
C200H-ID217
32 pts
C200H-ID218
64 pts
C200H-ID219
32 pts
16 mA at 4.5 V to 100 mA at 26.4 V
32 pts
C200H-OD218
C200H-OD219
32 pts
0.5 A (5 A/Unit) at 24 VDC
C200H-OD21B
32 input
pts
32 output pts
16 input and
16 output
points
Connects to B7A Link Terminals.
S
a da d o
g speed transmission
a s ss o
Standard
or high-speed
delay.
C200H-B7A12
32 input and
32 output
points
C200H-B7A02
C200H-B7A21
C200H-B7A22
99
Appendix A
Standard Models
Special I/O Units
High-density
g
y
I/O Units
U i
(see note 1)
Name
DC Input
p Units
Transistor Output
Units
U
s
Specifications
32 pts
32 pts
32 pts
5 VDC (TTL inputs); w/high-speed input
24 VDC; w/high-speed input
0.1 A, 24 VDC (useable as 128-point
dynamic output unit)
35 mA, 5 VDC (TTL outputs) (useable as
128-point dynamic output unit)
24-VDC inputs; w/high-speed input; 0.1-A,
24-VDC outputs (useable as 128-point
dynamic input unit)
C200H-ID501
C200H-ID215
C200H-OD215
16 input and 16
output pts
5-VDC TTL inputs; w/high speed input;
35-mA, 5-VDC TTL outputs (useable as
128-point dynamic input unit)
C200H-MD501
16 input and 16
output pts
12-VDC TTL inputs; w/high speed input;
12-VDC TTL outputs (useable as
128-point dynamic input unit)
C200H-MD115
32 pts
DC Input/Transistor
Output Units
Analog
g I/O
U i
Units
Analog
g Input
p Units
Analog
g Output
p Units
Mixed Analog I/O
Units
Fuzzy Logic Unit
Fuzzy Support
Software
Temperature
Sensor Units
p
16 input and 16
output pts
4 to 20 mA, –10 to 10 V; 4 outputs
1 to 5/0 to 10/–10 to 10 V (switchable); 8 outputs
4 to 20 mA; 8 outputs
4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to 10/–10 to 10 V (switchable); 2 inputs;
16 bits
4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to 10/–10 to 10 V (switchable);
2 outputs
Programmed using the Fuzzy Support Software. Up to 8
inputs and 4 outputs.
C200H-DA002
C200H-DA003
C200H-DA004
C200H-MAD01
Available on either 3.5” or 5.25” floppy disks.
C500-SU981-E
Thermocouple
p
K(CA) or J(IC), switchable; 4 inputs
K(CA) or L(Fe-CuNi) DIN standards;
4 inputs
Pt 100 Ω; 4 inputs
Pt 100 Ω; 4 inputs; DIN and 1989 JIS
standards
Transistor output
Voltage output
Current output
Transistor output
C200H-TS001
C200H-TS002
Voltage output
C200H-TC102
Current output
C200H-TC103
Transistor output
C200H-TV001
Voltage output
C200H-TV002
Current output
C200H-TV003
Transistor output
C200H-TV101
Voltage output
C200H-TV102
Current output
C200H-TV103
Thermocouple
p
Thermocouple
p
Pt resistance
thermometer
100
C200H-MD215
C200H-AD001
C200H-AD002
Pt resistance
thermometer
Heat/Cool
T
Temperature
t
Control
C t l Units
U it
C200H-OD501
4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to 10 V (switchable); 4 inputs; 12 bits
4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to 10/–10 to 10 V (switchable); 8 inputs;
12 bits or BCD
4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to 10/–10 to 10 V (switchable); 8 inputs;
16 bits
4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to 10 V (switchable); 2 outputs
Pt resistance
h
thermometer
Temperature
p
Control Units
Model number
C200H-AD003
C200H-DA001
C200H-FZ001
C200H-TS101
C200H-TS102
C200H-TC001
C200H-TC002
C200H-TC003
C200H-TC101
Appendix A
Standard Models
Name
Cam Positioner Unit
Specifications
Detects angles of rotation by means of a resolver and
provides ON and OFF outputs at specified angles. A
maximum of 48 cam outputs (16 external outputs and 32
internal outputs) maximum are available.
Model number
C200H-CP114
Data Setting Console
Used to set and monitor data in Temperature Control Units,
Cam Positioner Units, PID Control Units, and Heat/Cool
Temperature Control Units.
2m
4m
Transistor output; 4 to 20 mA/1 to 5 V/0 to 5V/0 to 10 V
inputs (selectable)
Voltage output; 4 to 20 mA/1 to 5 V/0 to 5V/0 to 10 V inputs
(selectable)
Current output; 4 to 20 mA/1 to 5 V/0 to 5V/0 to 10 V inputs
(selectable)
1 axis
Pulse output; speeds: 1 to 100,000 pps
1 axis
Pulse output; directly connects to
servomotor driver; compatible with line
driver; speeds: 1 to 250,000 pps
C200H-DSC01
2 axis
Pulse output; speeds: 1 to 250,000 pps,
53 pts per axis
1 axis
Pulse train output; directly connects to
servomotor driver
2 axis
Pulse train output; directly connects to
servomotor driver
4 axis
Pulse train output; directly connects to
servomotor driver
G-language programmable 2-axis analog outputs
C200H-NC211
IBM PC/AT or compatible
3.3 m
--2 m long
CV500-ZN3AT1-E
CQM1-CIF02
CVM1-PRS71
CV500-CN224
---
CVM1-MP701
Simplifies wiring for I/O connectors.
XW2B-20J6-6
Connecting
g Cables
PID Control Units
Position Control Units
Motion Control Unit
MC Support Software
Connecting cable
Teaching Box
Connection cable for
Teaching Box
Memory Pack (with
key sheet) (see note
2)
Terminal Block
Conversion Unit
Connecting cable for
Terminal Block
Conversion Unit
High-speed Counter Units
ASCII Unit
C200H-CN225
C200H-CN425
C200H-PID01
C200H-PID02
C200H-PID03
C200H-NC111
C200H-NC112
C200H-NC113
C200H-NC213
C200H-NC413
C200H-MC221
XW2Z-100J-F1
1 axis
Pulse input; counting speed: 50 kcps; 5
VDC/12 VDC/24 VDC
1 axis
Pulse input; counting speed: 75 kcps;
RS-422 line driver
2 axes
Pulse input; counting speed: 75 kcps;
RS-422 line driver; 7-digit BCD
24K-byte RAM and 24K-byte EEPROM are built-in.
C200H-CT001-V1
C200H-CT002
C200H-CT021
C200H-ASC02
101
Appendix A
Standard Models
Name
ID Sensor Units
Read/Write Heads
Data Carriers
Voice Unit (see note 3)
Connecting Cable
Specifications
Local application, electromagnetic coupling
Remote application; microwave transmissions
Model number
C200H-IDS01-V1
C200H-IDS21
Electromagnetic type
Microwave type
SRAM type for V600-H series.
EEPROM type for V600-H series.
60 messages max.; message length: 32, 48, or 64 s
(switchable)
V600-H series
V620-H series
RS-232C
C200H-CN224
V600-DjjRjj
V600-DjjPjj
C200H-OV001
Note: 1. When mounting a High-density I/O Unit as a Special I/O Unit to a Slave Rack, the Remote I/O Master
must be the C200H-RM001-PV1 or C200H-RM201.
2. The CV-series Programming Console can be used as a Teaching Box by replacing the Memory Pack of
the Programming Console.
3. Observe the following points when using the C200H-OV001 Voice Unit:
• The C200H-OV001 Voice Unit cannot be used when an OMRON display device (Programmable Terminal) is connected to the peripheral port or the RS-232C port of a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) CPU Unit in NT Link
mode. Connect the Programmable Terminal to the serial communications port of a C200HW-COMjj
Communications Board.
• When using a C200H-OV001 Voice Unit mounted on the PC, set the baud rate of the CPU Unit’s peripheral port or RS-232C port to 9,600 bps or less (regardless of the serial communications mode).
102
Appendix A
Standard Models
Communication Units
Name
SYSMAC LINK Unit
(coaxial cable)
Terminator
Attachment
Stirrup
F Adapter
F Adapter
Cover
SYSMAC LINK Unit
(optical fiber cable)
Power Supply
Adapter
Power Cable
SYSMAC LINK Support
Board (coaxial cable)
SYSMAC NET Link Unit
Power Supply
pp y
Ad
Adapter
Power Cable
Bus Connection Units
Host Link Units
Specifications
A Bus Connection Unit must be ordered Data link table:
sepa
aey
separately.
918 words
Data link table:
2,966 words
One required for each node at ends of System.
Provided with SYSMAC LINK Unit.
Model number
C200HW-SLK23
To connect network
To connect network
C1000H-CE001
C1000H-COV01
Connect with H-PCF cable. A Bus
Co
ec o Unit
U must
us be ordered
o de ed
Connection
separately.
Data link table:
918 words
Data link table:
2,966 words
Required when supplying backup power
For 1 or 2
Units
Connects Power Supply
pp y Adapter
p and SYSMAC
For 1 Unit
NET Li
Link
kU
Unit.
i
For 2 Units
To connect IBM PC/AT or compatible as node in SYSMAC LINK
system
A Bus Connection Unit must be ordered separately.
Required
q
when supplying
pp y g backup
p power
p
For 1 Unit
For 2 Units
Connects Power Supply
Included with
For 1 Unit
Adapter
and
SYSMAC
dap e a
dS
S C NET C200H-APS01
Link Unit.
Included with
For 2 Units
C200H-APS02
Connects SYSMAC LINK Unit or SYSMAC NET For 1 Unit
Link Unit to C200HW
COM01/COM04 E
C200HW-COM01/COM04-E
Communications Board
For 2 Units
C200HW-SLK13
Rack-mounting
APF/PCF
C200H-LK101-PV1
RS-422
C200H-LK202-V1
RS-232C
C200H-LK201-V1
RS-485
C200H-LK401
C200H, C200HS,
C200HE,
C200HG, C200HX
C200HW-SLK24
C1000H-TER01
C200H-TL001
C200HW-SLK14
C200H-APS03
C200H-CN111
C200H-CN211
3G8F5-SLK21-E
C200HS-SNT32
C200H-APS01
C200H-APS02
C200H-CN001
C200H-CN002
C200HW-CE001
C200HW-CE002
PC Link Unit
Single level: 32 Units
Multilevel: 16 Units
DeviceNet Master Unit
---
C200HW-DRM21
CompoBus/S Master Unit
---
C200HW-SRM21
103
Appendix A
Standard Models
Name
Remote I/O Master
Units
Specifications
Up to two per PC; connectable to up to 5 Slaves
per PC total
APF/PCF
Model number
C200H-RM001-PV1
Wired
C200H-RM201
Remote I/O Slave Units
Controller Link Unit
See Racks at beginning of product lists.
Enables data link and message communications.
Communications Board and Bus Connection Unit are required
separately.
C200HW-CLK21
PC Card Unit
Compatible with the PMCIA2.1 and provided with two PC Card I/F
slots. Ethernet extension function added.
C200HW-PCU01
C200HW-PCS01
Other Wired Remote I/O System Products
Name
Remote I/O Interface
I/O Blocks
AC Input Unit
DC Input Unit
Output Unit
Specifications
Either 12 or 24 VDC
Input
Output
Either 120 or 240 VAC.
Either 12 or 24 VDC
Either 12 or 24 VDC
Model number
G71-IC16
G71-OD16
G7TC-IA16
G7TC-ID16
G7TC-OC16
SYSMAC NET/SYSMAC LINK Hardware
Name
Specifications
Model number
SYSMAC NET Network Support Board
For IBM PC/AT or compatible
S3200-NSB11-E
SYSMAC LINK Network Support
Board
For IBM PC/AT or compatible, coaxial cable connector
3G8F5-SLK21-E
Link Adapters
Name
Link Adapters
104
Specifications
Model number
3 RS-422 connectors
3G2A9-AL001
3 optical connectors (APF/PCF)
3G2A9-AL002-PE
3 optical connectors (PCF)
3G2A9-AL002-E
1 connector for RS-232C; 2 for RS-422
3G2A9-AL003
1 connector each for APF/PCF, RS-422, and RS-232C
3G2A9-AL004-PE
1 connector each for PCF, RS-422, and RS-232C
3G2A9-AL004-E
1 connector each for APF/PCF and AGF
3G2A9-AL005-PE
1 connector each for PCF and AGF
3G2A9-AL005-E
1 connector for APF/PCF; 2 for AGF
3G2A9-AL006-PE
1 connector for PCF; 2 for AGF
3G2A9-AL006-E
O/E converter; 1 connector for RS-485, 1 connector each for
APF/PCF
B500-AL007-P
Used for on-line removal of SYSMAC NET Link Units from the
SYSMAC NET Link System, SYSMAC NET Optical Link Adapter 3
connectors for APF/PCF.
B700-AL001
Appendix A
Standard Models
Optical Fiber Products
Optical Fiber Cable for SYSMAC NET and SYSMAC LINK
H-PCF Optical Fiber Cable with Connectors
System
SYSMAC NET
SYSMAC LINK
Appearance
Model number
S3200-CNjjj-20-20
S3200-CNjjj-20-25
S3200-CNjjj-20-62
S3200-CNjjj-25-25
S3200-CNjjj-25-62
S3200-CNjjj-62-62
Model Numbers
The above cable model numbers specify the type of cable, the length, and the type of connectors attached.
S3200-CNjjj-20-25
1.
2.
3.
1.
S3200-CN specifies H-PCF optical fiber cable.
2.
The boxes (jjj) are replaced by codes indicating the standard model lengths, as shown below.
Consult with your OMRON representative for longer cables. When ordering longer cables, omit the portion
represented by the boxes and specify the length in meters separately, e.g., S3200-CN-20-20, 30 m.
Code
3.
Length
Code
Length
201
2m
152
15 m
501
5m
202
20 m
102
10 m
Omitted
Over 20 m
The last two portions of the model numbers (e.g., 20-25) specify the connectors, as shown below.
Code
Connector
20
S3200-COCF2011
25
S3200-COCF2511
62
S3200-COCH62M
105
Appendix A
Standard Models
Applicable Optical Fiber Connectors
Applicable Units
Model number/Appearance
pp
S3200-COCF2011
SYSMAC NET
CV500-SNT31
SYSMAC LINK
CV500-SLK11
C1000H-SLK11
S3200-COCF2511
C200HS-SNT32
C200HW-SLK13/14
S3200-COCH62M
S3200-LSU03-01E
S3200-NSUA1-00E
S3200-NSUG4-00E
S3200-NSB11-E
C500-SNT31-V4
B700-AL001
---
All Plastic Optical Fiber Cable for SYSMAC BUS/SYSMAC WAY
Name
Specifications
Model number
Standards
---
All Plastic Optical Fiber Cable
Cable only; order desired length in 5 m increments
between 5 and 100 m, or in increments of 200 m or
500 m.
3G5A2-PF002
Optical Connectors A
Two optical connectors (brown) for APF (10 m max.)
3G5A2-CO001
Optical Connectors B
Two optical connectors (black) for APF (8 to 20 m)
3G5A2-CO002
All Plastic Optical Fiber Cable
Set
1-m cable with an Optical Connector A connected to
each end
3G5A2-PF101
Optical Fiber Processing Kit
Accessory: 125-mm nipper (Muromoto Tekko’s 550M) 3G2A9-TL101
for APF
Plastic Clad Optical Fiber Cable for SYSMAC BUS/SYSMAC WAY
Name
Plastic Clad Optical Fiber
Cables (indoor)
Specifications
0.1 m, w/connectors
1 m, w/connectors
Ambient temp:
–10°
10° to 70°C
3G5A2-OF011
3G5A2-OF101
2 m, w/connectors
3G5A2-OF201
3 m, w/connectors
3G5A2-OF301
5 m, w/connectors
3G5A2-OF501
10 m, w/connectors
3G5A2-OF111
20 m, w/connectors
3G5A2-OF211
30 m, w/connectors
3G5A2-OF311
40 m, w/connectors
3G5A2-OF411
50 m, w/connectors
3G5A2-OF511
Cable only; order desired length between 1 and 500 m in increments of
1 m.
3G5A2-OF002
Cable only; order desired length between 501 and 800 m in increments
of 1 m.
106
Model number
Ambient temp:
0° to 55°C (do
not expose to
direct sunlight)
Standards
---
Appendix A
Standard Models
H-PCF Optical Fiber Cables (For SYSMAC NET, SYSMAC LINK, and SYSMAC BUS)
Name
Optical Fiber Cables
SYSMAC NET,
NET SYSMAC LINK
Specifications
10 m, black
50 m, black
100 m, black
500 m, black
Optical Fiber Cables
SYSMAC NET,
NET SYSMAC LINK
LINK,
SYSMAC BUS, SYSMAC WAY
Composite
cable including
two-core cable
and two-core
power supply
cable
S3200-HCLB101
S3200-HCLB502
S3200-HCLB103
S3200-HCLO101
50 m, orange
S3200-HCLO501
100 m, orange
S3200-HCLO102
500 m, orange
S3200-HCLO502
1,000 m, orange
S3200-HCLO103
Two-core cable
S3200-HCLB101
50 m, black
S3200-HCCB501
100 m, black
S3200-HCCB102
500 m, black
S3200-HCCB502
1000 m, black
S3200-HCCB103
10 m, orange
S3200-HCCO101
50 m, orange
S3200-HCCO501
100 m, orange
S3200-HCCO102
500 m, orange
S3200-HCCO502
1,000 m, orange
S3200-HCCO103
Two-core cord
---
S3200-HCLB102
10 m, orange
10 m, black
Standards
S3200-HCLB501
1,000 m, black
10 m, black
Optical Fiber Cable Connector
Model number
S3200-HBCB101
50 m, black
S3200-HBCB501
100 m, black
S3200-HBCB102
500 m, black
S3200-HBCB502
1,000 m, black
S3200-HBCB103
SYSMAC NET:
S3200-LSU03-01E
B700-AL001
C500-SNT31-V4
Full-lock conS3200-COCH62M
nector for NSU,
NSB,, and C500
SYSMAC NET
Link Unit
SYSMAC BUS:
C200H-RM001-PV1
C200H-RT001/RT002-P
C500-RM001-(P)V1
C500-RT001/RT002-(P)V1
3G2A9-jjj(-P)
Half-lock conS3200-COCH82
nector for Remote I/O Master, Remote I/O
Slave, Host Link
Unit, and Link
Adapter
SYSMAC NET/SYSMAC LINK
C200HS-SNT32
C200HW-SLK13/14
Half-lock connector
S3200-COCF2511
SYSMAC NET/SYSMAC LINK
CV500-SNT31
CV500-SLK11
CV1000H-SLK11
Full-lock connector
S3200-COCF2011
To relay at all SYSMAC NET
nodes
nodes.
COCF62M and
COCF62F are
used as a pair.
S3200-COCF62M
---
---
---
S3200-COCF62F
Note: 1. Optical fiber cables must be prepared and connected by specialists.
107
Appendix A
Standard Models
2. If the user prepares and connects optical fiber cables, the user must take a seminar held under the auspices of Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd. and obtain a proper certificate.
3. The Optical Power Tester, Head Unit, Master Fiber Set, and Optical Fiber Assembling Tool are required to
connect optical fiber cables.
4. You may want to use the Plastic Clad Optical Fiber Cable/All Plastic Optical Fiber Cable with connectors
listed on the previous two pages.
Optical Fiber Assembling Tool
Name
Optical Fiber Assembling Tool
Specifications
Model number
Used to connect H-PCF and crimp-cut connectors
for optical transmission systems such as the
SYSMAC C- and CV-series SYSMAC BUS,
SYSMAC LINK and SYSMAC NET.
S3200-CAK1062
Standards
---
Note: 1. Optical fiber cables must be prepared and connected by specialists.
2. The Optical Power Tester, Head Unit, Master Fiber set, and Optical Fiber Assembling Tool are required to
connect optical fiber cables.
Optical Power Tester
Name
Specifications
Optical Power Tester (see note) SYSMAC NET:
(provided with a connector
CV500-SNT31
adapter, light source unit, small
C200HS-SNT32
single head plug,
plug hard case
single-head
case,
SYSMAC LINK:
and AC adapter)
CV500-SLK11
C200HW-SLK13/14
CV1000H-SLK11
Head Unit
Model number
S3200-CAT200
2 (provided with
the Tester)
S3200-CAT2000
S3200-CAT270
2 (provided with
the Tester)
S3200-CAT2700
SYSMAC BUS:
C200H-RM001-PV1
C200H-RT001/RT002-P
C500-RM001-(P)V1
C500-RT001/RT002-(P)V1
S3200-CAT282
2 (provided with
the Tester)
S3200-CAT2820
SYSMAC NET:
S3200-LSU03-01E
C500-SNT31-V4
S3200-CAT320
2 (provided with
the Tester)
S3200-CAT3200
Standards
---
Note: There is no difference between the light source unit and connector adapter for the Head Unit and those for
the Optical Power Tester.
Head Unit
Name
Head Units (a set consisting of
light source unit and connector
adapter)
(see note)
108
Specifications
Model number
SYSMAC NET:
CV500-SNT31
C200HS-SNT32
S3200-CAT2002
SYSMAC LINK:
CV500-SLK11
C200HW-SLK13/14
CV1000H-SLK11
S3200-CAT2702
SYSMAC BUS:
C500-RM001-(P)V1
C500-RT001/RT002-(P)V1
C200H-RM001-PV1
C200H-RT001/RT002-PV1
S3200-CAT2822
SYSMAC NET:
S3200-LSU03-01E
C500-SNT31-V4
S3200-CAT3202
Standards
---
Appendix A
Standard Models
Note: Use a proper Head Unit model for the optical module to be used. If two types of optical modules (unit type
and board type) are used, order an Optical Power Tester plus a proper Head Unit model.
Master Fiber Set
Name
Master Fiber Sets (1 m)
Specifications
Model number
S3200-CAT3202 (SYSMAC NET, NSB, NSU,
Bridge)
S3200-CAT3201
S3200-CAT2002/CAT2702 (SYSMAC NET, SYSMAC LINK)
S3200-CAT2001H
S3200-CAT2822 (SYSMAC BUS)
S3200-CAT2821
Standards
---
Note: 1. The Master Fiber Set is used in combination with the Optical Power Tester to check the optical levels of
optical fiber cables connected to optical fiber cable connectors.
2. Optical fiber cables must be prepared and connected by specialists.
3. The Optical Power Tester, Head Unit, Master Fiber set, and Optical Fiber Assembling Tool are required to
connect optical fiber cables.
Programming Devices
Name
Specifications
Model number
Standards
Hand-Held, w/backlight
C200H-PR027-E
U, C
2-m Connecting Cable included
CQM1-PRO01-E
U, C
Programming Console
Mounting Bracket
Used to attach Hand-held Programming Console to a
panel.
C200H-ATT01
---
Programming Console
Connecting Cables
For Hand-held Programming Console
2m
C200H-CN222
---
4m
C200H-CN422
---
Programming Consoles
Data Setting Console
Used for data input and process value display for the
C200H-TCjjj, C200H-TVjjj, C200H-CP114,
and C200H-PID0j.
C200H-DSC01
Data Setting Console
Connecting Cables
For C200H-DSC01
2m
C200H-CN225
4m
C200H-CN425
Connecting Cable
Used to connect an IBM PC/AT or
compatible to the C200HX/HG/HE.
3.3 m
CQM1-CIF02
---
109
Appendix A
Standard Models
Optional Products
Name
I/O Unit Cover
Specifications
Cover for 10-pin terminal block
Model number
C200H-COV11
Standards
---
Terminal Block Cov- Short protection for 10-pin terminal block (package of 10 covers
ers); 8 pts
C200H-COV02
Short protection for 19-pin terminal block (package of 10 covers); 12 pts
C200H-COV03
Connector Cover
Protective cover for unused I/O Connecting Cable connectors
C500-COV01
Space Unit
Used for vacant slots
C200H-SP001
N, L
Battery Set
For C200H or C200HS RAM Memory Unit only
C200H-BAT09
---
Relay
24 VDC
G6B-1174P-FD-US ---
Backplane Insulation Plates
For C200HW-BC031 (3-slot CPU Backplane)
C200H-ATT31
For C200HW-BC051 (5-slot CPU Backplane)
C200H-ATT51
For C200HW-BC081-V1 (8-slot CPU Backplane)
C200H-ATT81
For C200HW-BC101-V1 (10-slot CPU Backplane)
C200H-ATTA1
For C200HW-BI031 (3-slot I/O Backplane)
C200HW-ATT32
For C200HW-BI051 (5-slot I/O Backplane)
C200HW-ATT52
For C200HW-BI081-V1 (8-slot I/O Backplane)
C200HW-ATT82
For C200HW-BI101-V1 (10-slot I/O Backplane)
C200HW-ATTA2
For 3-slot Backplane
C200H-ATT33
For 5-slot Backplane
C200H-ATT53
For 8-slot Backplane
C200H-ATT83
For 10-slot Backplane
C200H-ATTA3
---
C500-CE401
---
Solderless terminal; 40p and a Connector Cover (Crimp-type)
C500-CE402
---
Pressure welded terminal; 40p
C500-CE403
---
Solder terminal; 40p and a Connector Cover (Horizontal-type)
C500-CE404
---
Crimp-style terminal; 40p and a Connector Cover (Horizontaltype)
C500-CE405
---
I/O Brackets
External Connectors Solder terminal; 40p and a Connector Cover
110
---
N
Appendix A
Standard Models
Mounting Rails and Accessories
Name
Specifications
Model number
DIN Track Mounting
Bracket
1 set (2 included)
C200H-DIN01
DIN Tracks
Length: 50 cm; height: 7.3 cm
PFP-50N
Length: 1 m; height: 7.3 cm
PFP-100N
Length: 1 m; height: 16 mm
PFP-100N2
End Plate
---
PFP-M
Spacer
---
PFP-S
Standards
---
Note: Order DIN Tracks, End Plates, and Spacers in units of 10 each.
SYSMAC-CPT Support Software
Name
SYSMAC Support Software (for C20, CjjP,
CjjK, C120, CjjH,
C200H, C200HS,
C200HE, C200HG,
C200HX, C500, C1000H,
C2000H, CQM1, and
CVM1)
Specifications
3.5”, 2HD for IBM PC/AT compatible
Model number
C500-ZL3AT1-E
Standards
---
Note: Version 1.0 doesn’t support the additional
functions of the C200HX/HG/HE.
Protocol Support Software
Name
Protocol Support Software
Specifications
3.5”, 2HD for IBM PC/AT compatible
Model number
C200HW-ZW3AT1-E
Standards
---
Training Materials
Name
Specifications
Model number
Standards
SYSMAC Training System
Includes text book, cassette tape, and input
switch board.
C200H-ETL01-E
---
Fuzzy Training System
Includes a Fuzzy Training System Manual, a Main C200H-ETL13-E
Unit, a C200H-MR831 Memory Unit, a
C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console, a
C200H-CN222 Cable for the Programming Console, C500-SU981-E Fuzzy Training Software, an
RS-232C Cable, and a carrying belt.
---
111
Appendix B
Specifications
The following figures and tables provide specifications for each Unit of the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE. I/O Units
may take on one of two different shapes and are sometimes referred to as A-shape Units or B-shape Units.
Group-2 High-density I/O Units take on one of two different shapes and are sometimes referred to as C-shape
Units or D-shape Units. Refer to the figures at the end of the I/O Unit specifications for the exact dimensions of
these two shapes of I/O Unit.
General Specifications
Item
Power Supply
Unit
Supply voltage
Operating voltage
range
Power
consumption
Inrush current
Specifications
C200HW-PA204
C200HW-PA204S C200HW-PA204R
C200H-PA209R
C200HW-PD024
100 to 120 VAC/200 to 240 VAC (50/60 Hz)
24 VDC
85 to 132 VAC/170 to 264 VAC
19.2 to 28.8 VDC
120 VA max.
180 VA max.
40 W max.
30 A max.
30 A max. at 100
to 120 VAC
30 A max.
40 A at 200 to
240 VAC
Output capacity
5 VDC, 4.6 A (including power supply to the CPU Unit)
5 VDC, 9 A
(including power
supply to the CPU
Unit)
26 VDC, 1.3 A
Total: 45 W
26 VDC, 0.625 A
Total: 30 W
26 VDC, 0.625 A
24 VDC, 0.8 A
Total: 30 W
26 VDC, 0.625 A
Total: 30 W
Output terminals
Without
With
(see note 1)
Without
RUN output
(see note 5)
Without
Insulation
resistance
AC: 20 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) between external terminals and GR terminal
(see note 2)
Dielectric strength
AC: 2,300 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between external terminals and GR
terminals with a leakage current of 10 mA max. (see note 2)
5 VDC, 4.6 A
(including power
supply to the CPU
Unit)
26 VDC, 0.625 A
Total: 30 W
Without
SPST-NO contact
SPST-NO contact
Switching
capacity:
2 A at 250 VAC
(resistive load),
0.5 A at 250 VAC
(inductive load),
2 A at 24 VDC
Switching
capacity:
2 A at 240 VAC
(resistive load),
0.5 A at 120 VAC
(inductive load),
2 A at 24 VDC
(resistive load), 2
A at 24 VDC
(inductive load)
DC: 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between external terminals and GR
terminals with a leakage current of 10 mA max. (see note 2)
Without
DC: 20 MΩ min.
(at 500 VDC)
between external
terminals and GR
terminal (see note
2)
DC: 1,000 VAC,
50/60 Hz for 1
minute between
external terminals
and GR terminals
with a leakage
current of 10 mA
max. (see note 2)
113
Appendix B
Specifications
Power Supply
Unit
Noise immunity
C200HW-PA204
C200HW-PA204S
C200HW-PA204R
C200H-PA209R
C200HW-PD024
1,500 Vp-p, pulse width: 100 ns to 1 µs, rise time: 1 ns pulse (by noise simulator)
Vibration
resistance
JIS C0040 conforming,10 to 57 Hz; 0.075 mm amplitude, 57 to 150 Hz (see note 3); acceleration:
9.8 m/s2, in X, Y, and Z directions, for 80 minutes each (sweep time 8 min x 10 sweeps = 80 min);
(When mounted on DIN track, 2 to 55 Hz, 2.94 m/s2, in X, Y, and Z directions, for 20 minutes each)
Shock resistance
JIS C0041 conforming, 147 m/s2 in X, Y, and Z directions, 3 times each
Ambient
temperature
Humidity
Operating: 0° to 55°C; storage: –20° to 75°C (without battery)
Atmosphere
Must be free of the following:
• Corrosive gases
• Abrupt temperature changes
• Direct sunlight
• Dust, salt, or metal filings
• Water, oil, or chemicals
Grounding
Class 3 ground
Enclosure rating
Mounted in a panel
Weight
6 kg max.
Dimensions (CPU
Racks)
(See note 4.)
2-slot Rack:
3-slot Rack:
5-slot Rack:
8-slot Rack:
10-slot Rack:
10% to 90% (without condensation)
198.5 x 130 x 118 (WxHxD)
260 x 130 x 118 (WxHxD)
330 x 130 x 118 (WxHxD)
435 x 130 x 118 (WxHxD)
505 x 130 x 118 (WxHxD)
Note: If the C200HW-PA209R is used, D will be 153 mm in the above dimensions.
Note 1. The output voltage of the 24-VDC output will vary with the current consumption of the load as shown in
the following table. Be sure to check the current consumption and allowable voltage ranges of the devices connected before using these terminals. (The combined power consumption for 5 V, 26 V, and 24
V (24-VDC output on PA204S) must be 30 W or less.)
Load current on 24-VDC
output
Accuracy of 24-VDC output
for lot No. 0197 or later
Accuracy of 24-VDC output
for lot No. 3187 or earlier
Less than 0.3 A
+17%
–11%
+10%
–20%
0.3 A or higher
+10%
–11%
Lot numbers are as shown in the following diagram.
0 1 9 7
1997 (Rightmost digit of year)
September (Month: 1 to 9 = Jan to Sep, X/Y/Z = Oct/Nov/Dec
01 (Day: 01 to 31)
2. Internal components can be damaged if insulation resistance or dielectric strength tests are conducted
with the LG and GR terminals connected.
114
Appendix B
Specifications
3. Vibration Resistance
Acceleration (m/s2)
9.8
Amplitude
0.075 mm
10
57
150
Frequency (Hz)
4. Dimensions (Unit: mm)
5. RUN output is only available when the Power Supply Unit is mounted on the CPU Backplane.
115
Appendix B
Specifications
CPU Unit Specifications
Control Method
Stored program
I/O Control
Method
Programming
Method
Instruction Length
Cyclic scan and immediate processing are both possible.
Number of
Instructions
C200HE-CPUjj-E: 14 basic instructions + 231 special instructions
C200HE-CPUjj-ZE: 14 basic instructions + 286 special instructions
Execution Time
C200HE-CPUjj-E/ZE: 0.3 µs min.
C200HG-CPUjj-E/ZE: 0.15 µs min.
C200HX-CPUjj-E/ZE: 0.1 µs min.
Special instructions: C200HE-CPUjj-E/ZE: 1.2 µs min.
C200HG-CPUjj-E/ZE: 0.6 µs min.
C200HX-CPUjj-E/ZE: 0.4 µs min.
Program Capacity
C200HE-CPU11-E/ZE:
3.2K words max.
C200HE-CPU32-E/42-E/ZE: 7.2K words max.
C200HG-CPUjj-E/ZE:
15.2K words max.
C200HX-CPUj4-E/ZE:
31.2K words max.
C200HX-CPUj5-ZE:
36.2K words max.
IR Area: I/O bits
640 bits (00000 through 02915, 30000 through 30915)
IR Area: Work bits
6,528 bits (03000 through 23515, 31000 through 51115)
SR bits
1,016 (23600 through 25507 and 25600 through 29915)
TR bits
8 (TR 0 through 7)
HR bits
1,600 (HR 0000 through 9915)
AR bits
448 (AR 0000 through 2715)
LR bits
1,024 (LR 0000 through 6315)
Timers/Counters
512 (TIM/CNT 000 through 511)
DM words
Read/write: 6,144 (DM 0000 through 6143)
Read only: 512 (DM 6144 through 6655)
3,000 words max. (DM 7000 through 9999)
Expansion DM
Read/write
C200HE-CPUjj-E/ZE: None
C200HG-CPUjj-E/ZE: 6,144 words (EM 0000 to EM 6143)
C200HX-CPUjj-E/ZE: 6,144 words × 3 banks (EM 0000 to EM 6143)
C200HX-CPU65-ZE: 6,144 words × 8 banks (EM 0000 to EM 6143)
C200HX-CPU85-ZE: 6,144 words × 16 banks (EM 0000 to EM 6143)
Holds HR, AR, CNT, and DM, EM and clock (RTC) contents.
Power Failure
Backup Function
Memory Backup
Time
Self-diagnostic
Function
Program Check
Function
116
Ladder diagram
1 address/instruction, 1 to 4 words/instruction
Basic instructions:
The battery service life is five years at 25°C. The service life will be shortened if the battery is used
at higher temperatures.
Replace the battery within one week after the battery alarm indicator starts blinking. When
replacing the battery, install the new battery within five minutes after removing the old one.
CPU errors (watchdog timer), I/O verification errors, host link errors, memory errors, battery errors,
I/O bus errors, remote I/O errors, etc.
Carries out program checks at the beginning of operation for items such as no END instruction,
instruction errors, and so on.
Appendix B
Specifications
RS-232C Port Specifications
RS-232C Specifications
The specifications for the RS-232C port are given below. Devices that meet
these specifications can be connected.
Connector Pin Assignments
Pin assignments for the RS-232C port are given in the following table.
Pin
1
6
9
5
Abbreviation
Name
Direction
1
FG
Field ground
---
2
SD (TXD)
Send data
Output
3
RD (RXD)
Receive data
Input
4
RS (RTS)
Request to send
Output
5
CS (CTS)
Clear to send
Input
6
5V
Power supply
---
7
DR (DSR)
Data set ready
Input
8
ER (DTR)
Data terminal ready
Output
9
SG
Signal ground
---
Connector fitting
FG
Field ground
---
Connections
The connections between the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE and a personal computer are illustrated below as an example.
C200HE/C200HG/C200HX
Personal Computer
Signal
Pin
No.
Pin
No.
Signal
FG
1
1
CD
SD
2
2
RD
RD
3
3
SD
RS
4
4
ER
CS
5
5
SG
5V
6
6
DR
DR
7
7
RS
ER
8
8
CS
SG
9
9
CI
Shielded cable
Applicable Connectors
The following connectors are applicable. One plug and one hood are included
with the CPU Unit.
Plug: XM2S-0901 (OMRON) or equivalent
Hood: XM2S-0911 (OMRON) or equivalent
Port Specifications
Item
Specification
Communications method
Half duplex
Sync
Start-stop
Baud rate
1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600, or 19,200 bps
Transmission method
Point to point
Transmission distance
15 m max.
Interface
EIA RS-232C
117
Appendix B
Specifications
One-to-one Link Connections The RS-232C port on the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE can be connected to the
same port on another C200HX/C200HG/C200HE. Wire the cable as shown in
the diagram below.
C200HE/C200HG/C200HX
C200HE/C200HG/C200HX
Signal
Abb.
Pin
No.
Pin
No.
Signal
Abb.
FG
1
1
FG
SD
2
2
SD
RD
3
3
RD
RS
4
4
RS
CS
5
5
CS
5V
6
6
–
DR
7
7
DR
ER
8
8
ER
SG
9
9
SG
Ground the FG terminals of C200HX/C200HG/C200HE Units at a resistance of
less than 100 Ω.
118
Appendix B
Specifications
C200H Standard I/O Units
Name
Input
p
U i
Units
DC Input Units
Model number
Shape
8 pts
16 pts
8 pts
12 to 24 VDC
24 VDC
100 to 120 VAC
C200H-ID211
C200H-ID212
C200H-IA121
A
B
A
16 pts
100 to 120 VAC
C200H-IA122/IA122V
B
8 pts
200 to 240 VAC
C200H-IA221
A
16 pts
200 to 240 VAC
C200H-IA222/IA222V
B
AC/DC Input
p
U i
Unit
8 pts
16 pts
12 to 24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
C200H-IM211
C200H-IM212
A
B
Contact Output
p
U i
Unit
8 pts
12 pts
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
C200H-OC221
C200H-OC222
A
B
16 pts
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VAC (For resistive loads)
C200H-OC225
5 pts
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
Independent commons
C200H-OC223
A
8 pts
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
Independent commons
C200H-OC224
B
12 pts
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
C200H-OC222N
16 pts
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
C200H-OC226N
Extended
B-shape
8 pts
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
Independent commons
C200H-OC224N
B
8 pts
12 pts
1 A, 12 to 48 VDC
0.3 A, 24 VDC
C200H-OD411
C200H-OD211
A
B
16 pts
0.3 A, 24 VDC
C200H-OD2122
8 pts
2.1 A, 24 VDC
C200H-OD213
8 pts
0.8 A, 24 VDC; source type (PNP); with
load short protection
C200H-OD214
8 pts
5 to 24 VDC; source type (PNP)
C200H-OD216
12 pts
5 to 24 VDC; source type (PNP)
C200H-OD217
16 pts
1.0 A, 24 VDC; source type (PNP); with
load short protection
C200H-OD21A
8 pts
8 pts
1 A, 250 VAC
1.2 A 250 VAC
C200H-OA221
C200H-OA223
A
E
12 pts
0.3 A, 250 VAC
C200H-OA222V
B
AC Input Unit
Output
p
U i
Units
Specifications
Transistor
O
Output
Unit
U i
Triac Output
p
U i
Unit
12 pts
0.5 A, 250 VAC
C200H-OA224
Interrupt Input Unit1
8 pts
12 to 24 VDC
C200HS-INT01
Standard B7A Interface
U
s
Units
16 input Connects to B7A Link Terminals.
pts
16 output pts
C200H-B7AI1
4 timers 0.1 to 1 s/1 to 10 s/10 to 60 s/1 min to 10
min (switchable)
C200H-TM001
Connector w/lead wire (2 m) for 1 external resistor
C4K-CN223
Analog Timer Unit
Variable Resistor Connector
A
B
---
C200H-B7AO1
Note 1. If the Interrupt Input Unit is mounted on an Expansion I/O Rack, the interrupt function cannot be used
and the Interrupt Input Unit will be treated as an ordinary 8-point Input Unit. Moreover, Interrupt Input
Units cannot be used on Slave Racks. Use a C200HW-BCjj1 Backplane.
2. The Unit can overheat if more than 8 outputs are turned ON simultaneously.
119
Appendix B
Specifications
Optional Products
Name
Specifications
Model number
I/O Unit Cover
Terminal cover for 8-point or 5-point I/O Units
C200H-COV11
Connector Cover
Protective cover for unused Backplane connectors
C500-COV01
Space Unit
Used to hold space for an I/O Unit.
C200H-SP001
Note 1. When ordering, specify the model name (any component of which is not sold separately).
2. Order the press-fit tool from the manufacturer.
Standard I/O Units
DC Input Unit C200H-ID211
Rated Input Voltage
12 to 24 VDC
Operating Input Voltage
10.2 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance
2 kW
Input Current
10 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage
10.2 VDC min.
OFF Voltage
3.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time
1.5 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time
1.5 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits
1 (8 point/common)
Internal Current Consumption
10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
200 g max.
Dimensions
A-shape
Circuit Configuration
IN
IN
2 kW
COM
0.01
mF
Internal
Circuit
1.8
kW
12 to 24 VDC
Input indicator
Terminal Connections
0
1
2
3
12 to 24 VDC
4
5
6
7
COM
NC
120
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
Appendix B
Specifications
DC Input Unit C200H-ID212
Rated Input Voltage
24 VDC
Operating Input Voltage
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance
3 kW
Input Current
7 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage
14.4 VDC min.
OFF Voltage
5.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time
1.5 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time
1.5 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits
1 (16 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
300 g max.
Dimensions
B-shape
Circuit Configuration
IN
IN
3 kW
COM
0.01
mF
Internal
Circuit
1.8
kW
24 VDC
Input indicator
Terminal Connections
1
3
5
7
24 VDC
9
11
13
15
COM
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B0
0
B1
2
B2
4
B3
6
B4
8
B5 10
B6 12
B7 14
B8
NC
B9
NC
121
Appendix B
Specifications
AC Input Unit C200H-IA121
Rated Input Voltage
100 to 120 VAC 50/60 Hz
Operating Input Voltage
85 to 132 VAC 50/60 Hz
Input Impedance
9.7 kW (50 Hz), 8 kW (60 Hz)
Input Current
10 mA typical (at 100 VAC)
ON Voltage
60 VAC min.
OFF Voltage
20 VAC max.
ON Response Time
35 ms max. (at 100 VAC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time
55 ms max. (at 100 VAC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits
1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
250 g max.
Dimensions
A-shape
Circuit Configuration
IN
100 to
120 VAC
IN
0.33 mF 470 W
330 kW
COM
Internal
Circuit
910 W
Input indicator
Terminal Connections
0
A0
1
2
100 to
120 VAC
3
4
5
6
7
COM
NC
122
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
Appendix B
Specifications
AC Input Unit C200H-IA122/IA122V
Rated Input Voltage
100 to 120 VAC 50/60 Hz
Operating Input Voltage
85 to 132 VAC 50/60 Hz
Input Impedance
9.7 kW (50 Hz), 8 kW (60 Hz)
Input Current
10 mA typical (at 100 VAC)
ON Voltage
60 VAC min.
OFF Voltage
20 VAC max.
ON Response Time
35 ms max. (at 100 VAC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time
55 ms max. (at 100 VAC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits
1 (16 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
300 g max./400 g max. (IA122V)
Dimensions
B-shape
Circuit Configuration
IN
100 to
120 VAC
IN
0.33 mF 470 W
330 kW
COM
Internal
Circuit
910 W
Input indicator
Terminal Connections
1
3
5
100 to
120 VAC
7
9
B0
A0
A1
A2
A3
0
B1
2
B2
4
B3
6
B4
8
A4
B5 10
11
A5
B6 12
13
A6
B7 14
15
A7
B8 NC
COM
A8
B9 NC
123
Appendix B
Specifications
AC Input Unit C200H-IA221
Rated Input Voltage
200 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
Operating Input Voltage
170 to 264 VAC 50/60 Hz
Input Impedance
21 kW (50 Hz), 18 kW (60 Hz)
Input Current
10 mA typical (at 200 VAC)
ON Voltage
120 VAC min.
OFF Voltage
40 VAC max.
ON Response Time
35 ms max. (at 200 VAC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time
55 ms max. (at 200 VAC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits
1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
250 g max.
Dimensions
A-shape
Circuit Configuration
IN
IN
0.15 mF 820 Ω
200 to
240 VAC
680 kW
COM
Internal
Circuit
910 Ω
Input indicator
Terminal Connections
0
A0
1
2
200 to
240 VAC
3
4
5
6
7
COM
NC
124
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
Appendix B
Specifications
AC Input Unit C200H-IA222/IA222V
Rated Input Voltage
200 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
Operating Input Voltage
170 to 264 VAC 50/60 Hz
Input Impedance
21 kW (50 Hz), 18 kW (60 Hz)
Input Current
10 mA typical (at 200 VAC)
ON Voltage
120 VAC min.
OFF Voltage
40 VAC max.
ON Response Time
35 ms max. (at 200 VAC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time
55 ms max. (at 200 VAC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits
1 (16 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
300 g max./400 g max. (IA222V)
Dimensions
B-shape
Circuit Configuration
IN
IN
0.15 mF 680 Ω
200 to
240 VAC
680 kW
COM
Internal
Circuit
910 Ω
Input indicator
Terminal Connections
1
3
5
200 to
240 VAC
7
9
B0
A0
A1
A2
A3
0
B1
2
B2
4
B3
6
B4
8
A4
B5 10
11
A5
B6 12
13
A6
B7 14
15
A7
B8 NC
COM
A8
B9 NC
125
Appendix B
Specifications
AC/DC Input Unit C200H-IM211
Rated Input Voltage
12 to 24 VDC
Operating Input Voltage
10.2 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance
2 kW
Input Current
10 mA typical (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage
10.2 VDC min.
OFF Voltage
3.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time
15 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time
15 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits
1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
200 g max.
Dimensions
A-shape
Circuit Configuration
IN
IN
COM
2 kW
0.01
mF
1.8
kW
Internal
Circuit
12 to
24 VAC/DC
Input indicator
Terminal Connections
0
1
2
3
12 to
24 VAC/DC
4
5
6
7
COM
NC
126
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
Appendix B
Specifications
AC/DC Input Unit C200H-IM212
Rated Input Voltage
24 VDC
Operating Input Voltage
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance
3 kW
Input Current
7 mA typical (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage
14.4 VDC min.
OFF Voltage
5.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time
15 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time
15 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits
1 (16 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
250 g max.
Dimensions
B-shape
Circuit Configuration
IN
IN
COM
3 kW
0.01
mF
1.8
kW
Internal
Circuit
24 VAC/DC
Input indicator
Terminal Connections
1
3
5
7
24 VAC/DC
9
11
13
15
COM
B0
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
0
B1
2
B2
4
B3
6
B4
8
B5 10
B6 12
B7 14
B8
NC
B9
NC
127
Appendix B
Specifications
Contact Output Unit C200H-OC221
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
2 A 250 VAC (cosf = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosf =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (8 A/Unit)
10 mA 5 VDC
Relay
G6B-1174P-FD-US (24 VDC) w/socket
Service Life of Relay
Electrical: 500,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
ON Response Time
10 ms max.
OFF Response Time
10 ms max.
No. of Circuits
1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
Weight
10 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
250 g max.
Dimensions
A-shape
Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
COM
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
Terminal Connections
0
L
A0
1
A1
L
2
A2
L
3
A3
L
4
A4
L
5
A5
L
6
A6
L
7
A7
L
COM
NC
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
(inductive load: 2 A resistive load: 2 A) (8 A/Unit)
128
A8
A9
Appendix B
Specifications
Contact Output Unit C200H-OC222
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
2 A 250 VAC (cosf = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosf =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (8 A/Unit)
10 mA 5 VDC
Relay
G6B-1174P-FD-US (24 VDC) w/socket
Service Life of Relay
Electrical: 500,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
ON Response Time
10 ms max.
OFF Response Time
10 ms max.
No. of Circuits
Weight
1 (12 points/common) 8 points max. can be ON
simultaneously.
10 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
300 g max.
Dimensions
B-shape
Internal Current Consumption
Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
COM
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
Terminal Connections
1
L
L
L
3
5
7
L
9
L
11
L
B0
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
NC
A6
NC
A7
COM
A8
0
L
B1
2
L
B2
4
L
B3
6
B4
8
B5 10
B6
NC
B7
NC
B8
NC
B9
NC
L
L
L
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
(inductive load: 2 A resistive load: 2 A) (8 A/Unit)
129
Appendix B
Specifications
Contact Output Unit C200H-OC225
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
2 A 250 VAC (cosf = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosf =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (8 A/Unit)
10 mA 5 VDC
Relay
G6B-1174P-FD-US (24 VDC) w/socket
Service Life of Relay
Electrical: 500,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
ON Response Time
10 ms max.
OFF Response Time
10 ms max.
No. of Circuits
Weight
1 (16 points/common) 8 points max. can be ON
simultaneously.
50 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
400 g max.
Dimensions
B-shape
Internal Current Consumption
Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
COM
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
Terminal Connections
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
COM
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
0
B0
B1 2
B2 4
B3 6
B4 8
B5 10
B6 12
B7 14
B8 NC
B9 NC
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
(inductive load: 2 A resistive load: 2 A) (8 A/Unit)
Note This Unit can overheat if more than 8 output points are turned ON simultaneously.
130
Appendix B
Specifications
Contact Output Unit C200H-OC223
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
2 A 250 VAC (cosf = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosf =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (10 A/Unit)
10 mA 5 VDC
Relay
G6B-1174-P-FD-US (24 VDC) w/socket
Service Life of Relay
Electrical: 500,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
ON Response Time
10 ms max.
OFF Response Time
10 ms max.
No. of Circuits
5 independent contacts
Internal Current Consumption
Weight
10 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
250 g max.
Dimensions
A-shape
Circuit Configuration
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
OUTc
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
Terminal Connections
L
0
c0
L
1
c1
2
L
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
(inductive load: 2 A
resistive load: 2 A)
(10 A/Unit)
c2
L
3
c3
4
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
L
c4
A9
131
Appendix B
Specifications
Contact Output Unit C200H-OC224
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
2 A 250 VAC (cosf = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosf =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (16 A/Unit)
10 mA 5 VDC
Relay
G6B-1174-P-FD-US (24 VDC) w/socket
Service Life of Relay
Electrical: 500,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
ON Response Time
10 ms max.
OFF Response Time
10 ms max.
No. of Circuits
8 independent contacts
Internal Current Consumption
Weight
10 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
300 g max.
Dimensions
B-shape
Circuit Configuration
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
OUTc
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
Terminal Connections
c0
c1
B0
A0
A1
c2
A2
c3
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
(inductive load: 2 A
resistive load: 2 A)
(16 A/Unit)
A3
c4
A4
c5
A5
c6
A6
c7
A7
NC
132
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
B8 NC
B9 NC
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Appendix B
Specifications
Contact Output Unit C200H-OC222V/OC222N
Max. Switching Capacity
2 A 250 VAC (cosf = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosf =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (8 A/Unit)
10 mA 5 VDC
Min. Switching Capacity
Relay
OC222V: G6R-1 (24 VDC) w/socket
OC222N: G6RN-1-ACD (24 VDC) soldered to
board
Service Life of Relay
ON Response Time
Electrical: 300,000 operations
Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations
15 ms max.
OFF Response Time
15 ms max.
No. of Circuits
Weight
1 (12 points/common) 8 points max. can be ON
simultaneously.
8 mA 5 VDC max. 90 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
400 g max.
Dimensions
B-shape
Internal Current Consumption
Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
COM
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
Terminal Connections
1
L
L
L
3
5
7
L
9
L
11
L
B0
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
NC
A6
NC
A7
COM
A8
0
L
B1
2
L
B2
4
L
B3
6
B4
8
B5 10
B6
L
L
L
NC
B7
NC
B8
NC
B9
NC
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
(inductive load: 2 A resistive load: 2 A) (8 A/Unit)
133
Appendix B
Specifications
Contact Output Unit C200H-OC226/OC226N
Max. Switching Capacity
2 A 250 VAC (cosf = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosf =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (8 A/Unit)
10 mA 5 VDC
Min. Switching Capacity
Relay
OC226: G6R-1 (24 VDC) w/socket
OC226N: G6RN-1-ACD (24 VDC) soldered to
board
Service Life of Relay
ON Response Time
Electrical: 300,000 operations
Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations
15 ms max.
OFF Response Time
15 ms max.
No. of Circuits
Weight
1 (16 points/common) 8 points max. can be ON
simultaneously.
30 mA 5 VDC max. 90 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
500 g max.
Dimensions
Extended B-shape
Internal Current Consumption
Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
COM
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
Terminal Connections
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
COM
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
0
B0
B1 2
B2 4
B3 6
B4 8
B5 10
B6 12
B7 14
B8 NC
B9 NC
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
(inductive load: 2 A resistive load: 2 A) (8 A/Unit)
134
Appendix B
Specifications
Contact Output Unit C200H-OC224V/OC224N
Max. Switching Capacity
2 A 250 VAC (cosf = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosf =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (16 A/Unit)
10 mA 5 VDC
Min. Switching Capacity
Relay
OC224V: G6R-1 (24 VDC) w/socket
OC224N: G6RN-1-ACD (24 VDC) soldered to
board
Service Life of Relay
ON Response Time
Electrical: 300,000 operations
Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations
15 ms max.
OFF Response Time
15 ms max.
No. of Circuits
8 independent contacts
Internal Current Consumption
Weight
10 mA 5 VDC max. 90 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
350 g max.
Dimensions
B-shape
Circuit Configuration
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
OUTc
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
Terminal Connections
c0
c1
B0
A0
A1
c2
A2
c3
250 VAC 24 VDC max.
(inductive load: 2 A
resistive load: 2 A)
(16 A/Unit)
A3
c4
A4
c5
A5
c6
A6
c7
A7
NC
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
B8 NC
B9 NC
Note There are no restrictions in the polarity when connecting a DC power supply.
135
Appendix B
Specifications
Life Expectancy of Contact Output Unit
30 VDC, L/R = 40 ms
OMRON’s H3BA
(electromagnetic valve)
Timer (200 VAC)
OMRON’s MA415A
Contactor (200 VAC)
250 VAC, cosφ = 0.4
30 VDC, L/R = 7 ms
(HK, MM, and MY
Hinge-type Relay)
250 VAC, cosφ =
130 VDC, L/R = 0
OMRON’s
MY4 Relay
(200 VAC)
Electromagnetic
valve (250 VAC,
cosφ = 0.08 to
0.1)
Contact current (normal current) (A)
Life expectancy (x 10 4 operations)
Life expectancy (x 10 4 operations)
The C200H-OC221/222/223/224/225 Contact Output Unit uses OMRON’s G6B-1174P-FD-US Relay. The life of
the G6B-1174P-FD-US Relay varies with the contact current and ambient temperature. Refer to the following
graphs to calculate this value, and be sure to replace the Relays before their service life expires.
Contact Current vs. Life Expectancy
Ambient Temperature vs. Life
Expectancy
Conditions
Conditions
Switching frequency: 1,800 times/hour max.
Switching frequency: 1,800 times/hour max.
Ambient temperature: 23°C
2 A at 250 VAC, resistive load
2 A at 30 VDC, resistive load
1 A at 250 VAC,
resistive load
1 A at 30 VDC,
resistive load
1 A at 250 VAC, inductive load
(cosφ = 0.4)
1 A at 30 VDC, inductive load
(L/R = 7 ms)
2 A at 250 VAC, inductive
load (cosφ = 0.4)
2 A at 30 VDC, inductive
load (L/R = 7 ms)
Ambient temperature (°C)
Note 1. If the Contact Output Unit is panel-mounted, the temperature inside the panel represents the ambient
temperature.
2. The life of the Relay at an ambient temperature of 55°C is one-fifth the life of the Relay at room temperature (0° to 40°C).
Inductive Load
The life of the Relay varies with the load inductance. If any inductive load is connected to the Contact Output Unit,
use an arc killer with the Contact Output Unit using an inductive load.
Be sure to connect a diode in parallel with every DC inductive load that is connected to the Contact Output Unit.
Contact Protection Circuit
Arc killers are used with the Contact Output Unit in order to prolong the life of each Relay mounted to the Contact
Output Unit, prevent noise, and reduce the generation of carbide and nitrate deposits. Arc killers can, however,
reduce relay life if not use correctly.
Note Arc killers used with the Contact Output Unit can delay the resetting time required by each Relay mounted to
the Contact Output Unit.
136
Appendix B
Specifications
Arc killer circuit examples are listed in the following table.
Circuit
Current
AC
Power
supply
Power
supply
Power
supply
Inductive
load
Varistor method
The capacitance of the capacitor must
be 1 to 0.5 µF per contact current of
1 A and resistance of the resistor must
be 0.5 to 1 Ω per contact voltage of
1 V. These values, however, vary with
the load and the characteristics of the
relay. Decide these values from
experiments, and take into
consideration that the capacitance
suppresses spark discharge when the
contacts are separated and the
resistance limits the current that flows
into the load when the circuit is closed
again.
The dielectric strength of the capacitor
must be 200 to 300 V. If the circuit is
an AC circuit, use a capacitor with no
polarity.
The reversed dielectric strength value
of the diode must be at least 10 times
as large as the circuit voltage value.
The forward current of the diode must
be the same as or larger than the load
current.
The reversed dielectric strength value
of the diode may be two to three times
larger than the supply voltage if the
arc killer is applied to electronic
circuits with low circuit voltages.
DC
Yes
If the load is a relay or solenoid, there
is a time lag between the moment the
circuit is opened and the moment the
load is reset.
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V,
insert the arc killer in parallel with the
load. If the supply voltage is 100 to
200 V, insert the arc killer between the
contacts.
No
Yes
The diode connected in parallel with
the load changes energy accumulated
by the coil into a current, which then
flows into the coil so that the current
will be converted into Joule heat by
the resistance of the inductive load.
This time lag, between the moment
the circuit is opened and the moment
the load is reset, caused by this
method is longer than that caused by
the CR method.
Yes
Yes
The varistor method prevents the
imposition of high voltage between the
contacts by using the constant voltage
characteristic of the varistor. There is
time lag between the moment the
circuit is opened and the moment the
load is reset.
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V,
insert the varistor in parallel with the
load. If the supply voltage is 100 to
200 V, insert the varistor between the
contacts.
Inductive
load
Diode method
Required element
Yes
Inductive
load
CR method
Characteristic
---
Power
supply
Inductive
load
Note Do not connect a capacitor as an arc killer in parallel with an inductive load as shown in the following diagram. This arc killer is very effective for preventing spark discharge at the moment when the circuit is
opened. However when the contacts are closed, the contacts may be welded due to the current charged in
the capacitor.
DC inductive loads can be more difficult to switch than resistive loads. If appropriate arc killers are used,
however, DC inductive loads will be as easy to switch as resistive loads.
137
Appendix B
Specifications
Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD411
Max. Switching Capacity
12 to 48 VDC 1 A (3 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity
None
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
1.4 V max.
ON Response Time
0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time
0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits
1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
140 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating
5 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply
30 mA 12 to 48 VDC min.
Weight
250 g max.
Dimensions
A-shape
Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
V
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
Fuse
COM
12 to
48 VDC
Fuse blowout
detection circuit
Fuse: GSS (Nagasawa)
5 A 125 V 5.2-dia 20
F indicator
Note When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and bit 08 turns ON. Bits 08 through 15 cannot be used as IR bits.
Terminal Connections
L
L
L
L
12 to 48 VDC
(1 A max., 3 A/Unit)
L
L
L
L
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
COM (0 V)
A8
12 to 48 VDC
A9
Note Be sure to supply power to A9; otherwise current will leak through the load while the output is OFF.
138
Appendix B
Specifications
Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD211
Max. Switching Capacity
0.3 A 24 VDC +10%/–15% (2 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity
None
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
1.4 V max.
ON Response Time
0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time
0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits
1 (12 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
160 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating
5 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply
25 mA 24 VDC +10%/–15% min.
Weight
300 g max.
Dimensions
B-shape
Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
+V
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
24 VDC
Fuse
COM
Fuse: GGS (Nagasawa)
5 A 125 V 5.2-dia 20
Note 1. No blown fuse detector circuit is provided.
2. Check the fuse when there is no output.
Terminal Connections
L
L
L
24 VDC
(0.3 A max., 2 A/Unit)
L
L
L
1
3
5
7
9
11
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
NC
A6
NC
A7
COM (0 V)
A8
B0
0
L
B1
2
L
B2
4
L
B3
6
B4
8
B5 10
L
L
L
B6
NC
B7
NC
B8
NC
+ 24 VDC
B9
Note Be sure to supply power to B9; otherwise current will leak through the load while the output is OFF.
139
Appendix B
Specifications
Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD212
Max. Switching Capacity
0.3 A 24 VDC +10%/–15% (4.8 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity
None
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
1.4 V max.
ON Response Time
0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time
0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits
1 (16 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
180 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating
8 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply
35 mA 24 VDC +10%/–15% min.
Weight
350 g max.
Dimensions
B-shape
Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before October 9, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 09X2 or earlier)
OUT
L
+V
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
24 VDC
Fuse
Fuse: UL-TSC-8A-N1 (Nagasawa)
8 A 125 V 5.2-dia 20
Note 1. No blown fuse detector circuit is provided.
2. Check the fuse when there is no output.
140
COM
Appendix B
Specifications
Terminal Connections
1
L
3
L
A1
5
L
24 VDC
(0.3 A max )
A0
A2
7
L
A3
9
B0
0
L
B1
2
L
B2
4
L
B3
6
B4
8
A4
L
L
B5 10 L
11
A5
L
B6 12 L
13
A6
L
B7 14 L
15
A7
L
B8 NC
A8
+ 24 VDC
COM (0 V)
B9
L
Note Be sure to supply power to B9; otherwise current will leak through the load while the output is OFF.
Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD213
Max. Switching Capacity
2.1 A 24 VDC +10%/–15% (5.2 A/Unit) NPN output
Min. Switching Capacity
None
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
1.4 V max.
ON Response Time
0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time
0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits
1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
140 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating
8 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply
30 mA 24 VDC +10%/–15% min.
Weight
250 g max.
Dimensions
A-shape
Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
+V
Output indicator
Internal
Circuit
OUT
L
24 VDC
Fuse
Fuse blowout
detection circuit
COM
Fuse: UL-TSC-8A-N1 (Nagasawa)
8 A 125 V 5.2-dia 20
F indicator
Note When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and bit 08 turns ON. Bits 08 through 15 cannot be used as IR bits.
141
Appendix B
Specifications
Terminal Connections
L
L
L
L
24 VDC
(2.1 A max., 5.2 A/Unit)
L
L
L
L
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
COM (0 V)
A8
24 VDC
A9
Note Be sure to supply power to A9; otherwise current will leak through the load while the output is OFF.
Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD214
(Load Short-circuit Protection Provided)
Min. Switching Capacity
24 VDC +10%/–15% 0.8 A (2.4 A/Unit) surge current
2 A (source type) PNP output
None
Leakage Current
1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
1.5 V max.
ON Response Time
1 ms max.
OFF Response Time
1 ms max.
No. of Circuits
1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
140 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating
Short-circuit protection
Power for External Supply
150 mA 24 VDC +10%/–15% min.
Weight
250 g max.
Dimensions
A-shape
Max. Switching Capacity
Overcurrent protection
Thermal protection
Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
Output indicator
Source
Driver
Internal
Circuit Reset
button
+V
OUT
L
+
24 VDC
COM
Alarm Output
indicator
142
Appendix B
Specifications
Terminal Connections
0
L
L
24 VDC
(0.8 A max., 2.4 A/Unit)
L
L
L
A1
2
L
L
A0
1
L
A2
3
A3
4
A4
5
A5
6
A6
7
A7
COM (0 V)
A8
24 VDC
A9
Note Be sure to supply power to A9; otherwise current will leak through the load while the output is OFF.
C200H-OD214 Short-Circuit Protection
The C200H-OD214 Output Unit is equipped with two types of short-circuit protection: overcurrent protection and
thermal protection. Any short-circuit must be eliminated immediately in order to avoid damage to the Unit.
Overcurrent Protection
When the output current reaches 2 A, the alarm output turns ON, and the alarm indicator lights. Make sure the
surge current of the load does not exceed 2 A, or the alarm may be activated.
Thermal Protection
When the junction temperature of the output transistor reaches its upper limit, the output turns OFF, the alarm
output turns ON, and the alarm indicator blinks. But the output transistor is provided with a heat sink. So in some
cases, when the output is short-circuited the thermal protection may not activate because the extra heat is dissipated by the heat sink. However, the alarm indicator will still light and the alarm output will still turn ON.
How It Works
When the short-circuit protection activates, the output displays the characteristic shown below.
Output
Voltage
Overcurrent
limit alarm
output point
0
Output current:
2 A (minimum value)
Each pair of outputs share one alarm indicator and one alarm output bit as shown below (bits 12 through 15 cannot
be used as IR bits)
Output No.
0
1
2
3
4
5 6
7
Alarm indicator No.
0
2
4
6
Alarm Output Point No.
08
09
10
11
Both the alarm indicator and alarm output bit for the short-circuited output turn ON even if only one of the outputs is
short-circuited. Both outputs should be disconnected until the short-circuit can be traced.
143
Appendix B
Specifications
Clearing the Alarm
When the short-circuit has been eliminated, reset the Unit by pressing the reset button. The alarm indicator will go
out, the alarm output will turn OFF, and the output will be reset.
Output indicator
Alarm indicator
Reset button (use a screwdriver
or other similar object to press it).
Programming Example
If there is a short-circuit in an output, we want the program to turn that output OFF. Assume that the Unit is mounted
at word 000. A program to turn OFF output bits 00 and 01 is shown below.
A
00008
00000
B
00008
00001
Since alarm output bit 08 covers both output bits 00 and 01, both these outputs are forced OFF as soon as output
bit 08 turns ON (bits A and B can be any other bits required in the program).
Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD216
Max. Switching Capacity
0.3 A 5 to 24 VDC
Min. Switching Capacity
10 mA 5 VDC
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
1.5 V max.
ON Response Time
1.5 ms max.
OFF Response Time
2 ms max.
No. of Circuits
Fuse Rating
1 (8 points/common) positive common (source
type)
10 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
None
Power for External Supply
N/A
Weight
250 g max.
Dimensions
A-shape
Internal Current Consumption
Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
Output indicator
OUT
Internal
Circuit
5 to 24 VDC
COM
144
L
Appendix B
Specifications
Terminal Connections
L
1
L
2
L
L
5 to 24 VDC
0
L
L
L
L
3
4
5
6
7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
COM A8
NC A9
Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD217
Max. Switching Capacity
0.3 A 5 to 24 VDC
Min. Switching Capacity
10 mA 5 VDC
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
1.5 V max.
ON Response Time
1.5 ms max.
OFF Response Time
2 ms max.
No. of Circuits
Fuse Rating
1 (12 points/common) positive common (source
type)
10 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
None
Power for External Supply
N/A
Weight
300 g max.
Dimensions
B-shape
Internal Current Consumption
Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
5 to
24 VDC
COM
145
Appendix B
Specifications
Terminal Connections
1
L
3
L
5 to 24 VDC
5
L
7
L
9
L
11
L
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
NC A6
NC A7
COM A8
B0
0
B1
2
B2
4
B3
6
B4
8
B5 10
L
L
L
L
L
L
B6 NC
B7 NC
B8 NC
B9 NC
C200H-OD21A Transistor Output Unit (16 Points, Sourcing)
(Load Circuit Protection Provided)
Max. Switching Capacity
24 VDC +10%/–15%, 1.0 A (4 A/Unit)
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
0.8 V max.
ON Response Time
0.1 ms max.
OFF Response Time
0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits
1 (16 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
160 mA 5 VDC max.
Load Short-circuit Protection
Detection current: 1.2 A min (1.6 A typical)
Power for External Supply
35 mA 24 VDC +10%/–15% min.
Weight
400 g max.
Alarm Output (See note 1.)
No. of outputs: 1 (2 kΩ internal resistor)
Connectable Units: Only the following DC Input
Units can be connected:
C200H-ID001, ID211, ID212, IM211 (DC), IM212
(DC), ID215, ID501, MD115, MD215, MD501
Used when alarm output turns ON. Value will
depend on the external power supply. (See note 2.)
Detection current: 1.2 A min.
(1.6 A typical)
B-shape
Reset Input
Load Short-circuit Protection
Dimensions
Internal circuits
Output
indicator
Short-circuit
protection
circuit
Circuit Configuration
to
0V
2 kΩ
Note When short-circuit/overload protection is activated, all 16 outputs will be switched OFF and the ALARM
output becomes active (low level). The problem can be detected externally by connecting a DC Input Unit to
146
Appendix B
Specifications
the ALARM output or by connecting an alarm output indicator. It’s not possible to connect both the Input Unit
and the indicator at the same time. Unless the external I/O power supply is connected and turned ON, the
indicator will not light even if the output contact turns ON.
Terminal Connections
+24 VDC
0V
24 VDC
Note When the ALARM output turns ON, remove the cause of the high current and then shut off the external
power supply for approx. 1 second. After confirming that the cause has been removed, turn ON the power
supply again to reset the output. As shown in the diagram, it is recommended that a relay or switch that turns
ON or OFF only the external power supply be connected right before the B9 (+V). Check that this relay or
switch has a contact capacity higher than the external power supply current consumption (35 mA + load
current minimum).
Triac Output Unit C200H-OA122-E
Max. Switching Capacity
1.2 A 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz (4 A/Unit)
Max. Inrush Current
15 A (pulse width: 100 ms)
30 A (pulse width: 10 ms)
100 mA 10 VAC/50 mA 24 VAC/10 mA 100 VAC
min.
1.5 mA (120 VAC) max.
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
1.5 VAC max. (50 to 1,200 mA)/ 5 VAC max. (10 to
50 mA)
1 ms max.
OFF Response Time
1/2 of load frequency+1 ms or less.
No. of Circuits
1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
180 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating
5 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply
N/A
Weight
300 g max.
Dimensions
E-shape
147
Appendix B
Specifications
Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
OUT
Output indicator
L
Internal
Circuit
Fuse
COM
120 VAC max.
Fuse blowout
detection circuit
F indicator
Fuse: 5 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20) GGS (Nagasawa)
Note When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and bit 08 turns ON. Bits 08 through 15 cannot be used as IR bits.
Terminal Connections
120 VAC max.
(1.2 A max. 4 A/Unit)
148
L
0
A0
L
1
A1
L
2
A2
L
3
A3
L
4
A4
L
5
A5
L
6
A6
L
7
A7
COM
A8
NC
A9
Appendix B
Specifications
Triac Output Unit C200H-OA221
Max. Switching Capacity
1 A 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz (4 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
10 mA (resistive load)/40 mA (inductive load) 10
VAC
3 mA (100 VAC) max./6 mA (200 VAC) max.
Residual Voltage
1.2 V max.
ON Response Time
1 ms max.
OFF Response Time
1/2 of load frequency or less.
No. of Circuits
1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
140 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating
5 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply
N/A
Weight
250 g max.
Dimensions
A-shape
Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
Fuse
COM
250 VAC max.
Fuse blowout
detection circuit
F indicator
Fuse: 5 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20) MF51SH (JIS)
Note When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and bit 08 turns ON. Bits 08 through 15 cannot be used as IR bits.
Terminal Connections
L
0
1
L
2
L
3
L
250 VAC max
(1 A max. 4 A/Unit)
4
L
5
L
6
L
7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
L
A7
COM
A8
NC
A9
149
Appendix B
Specifications
Triac Output Unit C200H-OA222V
Max. Switching Capacity
0.3 A 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz (2 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
10 mA (resistive load)/40 mA (inductive load)
10 VAC
3 mA (100 VAC) max./6 mA (200 VAC) max.
Residual Voltage
1.2 V max.
ON Response Time
1/2 of load frequency or less
OFF Response Time
1/2 of load frequency or less.
No. of Circuits
1 (12 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
200 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating
3 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply
N/A
Weight
400 g max.
Dimensions
B-shape
Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
Fuse
COM
250 VAC max.
Fuse: 3 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20) MQ4 (SOC)
Note 1. No blown fuse detector circuit is provided.
2. Check the fuse when there is no output.
Terminal Connections
1
L
3
L
L
L
5
7
9
L
11
L
250 VAC max.
(0.3 A max., 2 A/Unit)
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
NC
A6
NC
A7
COM
150
B0
A0
A8
0
B1
2
B2
4
B3
6
B4
8
B5
10
B6
NC
B7
NC
B8
NC
B9
NC
L
L
L
L
L
L
Appendix B
Specifications
Triac Output Unit C200H-OA223
Max. Switching Capacity
1.2 A 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz (4 A/Unit)
Max. Inrush Current
15 A (pulse width: 100 ms)
30 A (pulse width: 10 ms)
100 mA 10 VAC/50 mA 24 VAC/10 mA 100 VAC
min.
1.5 mA (120 VAC) max./3 mA (240 VAC) max.
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
1.5 VAC max. (50 to 1,200 mA)/ 5 VAC max. (10 to
50 mA)
1 ms max.
OFF Response Time
1/2 of load frequency+1 ms or less.
No. of Circuits
1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
180 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating
5 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply
N/A
Weight
300 g max.
Dimensions
E-shape
Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
OUT
Output indicator
L
Internal
Circuit
Fuse
COM
250 VAC max.
Fuse blowout
detection circuit
F indicator
Fuse: 5 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20) HT (SOC)
Note When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and bit 08 turns ON. Bits 08 through 15 cannot be used as IR bits.
Terminal Connections
L
250 VAC max.
(1.2 A max. 4 A/Unit)
0
A0
L
1
A1
L
2
A2
L
3
A3
L
4
A4
L
5
A5
L
6
A6
L
7
A7
COM
A8
NC
A9
151
Appendix B
Specifications
Triac Output Unit C200H-OA224
Max. Switching Capacity
0.5 A 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz (2 A/Unit)
Max. inrush current
10 A (pulse width: 100ms)
20 A (pulse width: 10 ms)
100 mA 10 VAC/50 mA 24 VAC/10 mA 100 VAC
min.
1.5 mA (120 VAC) max./3 mA (240 VAC) max.
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
1.5 VAC max. (50 to 500 mA)/5 VAC max. (10 to
50 mA)
1 ms max.
OFF Response Time
1/2 of load frequency + 1 ms or less.
No. of Circuits
1 (12 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
270 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating
3.15 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply
N/A
Weight
300 g max.
Dimensions
B-shape
Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
OUT
Output indicator
L
Internal
Circuit
Fuse
COM
250 VAC max.
Fuse: 3.15 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20) MT4 (SOC)
Note 1. No blown fuse detector circuit is provided.
2. Check the fuse when there is no output.
Terminal Connections
1
L
3
L
L
L
5
7
9
L
11
L
250 VAC max.
(0.5 A max., 2 A/Unit)
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
NC
A6
NC
A7
COM
152
B0
A8
0
B1
2
B2
4
B3
6
B4
8
B5
B6
10
NC
B7
NC
B8
NC
B9
NC
L
L
L
L
L
L
Appendix B
Specifications
Group-2 High-density I/O Units
In the following diagrams, “m” is the first word allocated to the Unit in PC memory.
DC Input Unit C200H-ID111 (64 Points)
Rated Input Voltage
12 VDC +10%/–15%
Operating Input Voltage
10.2 to 13.2 VDC
Input Impedance
2.7 kW
Input Current
4.1 mA (at 12 VDC)
ON Voltage
8.0 VDC min.
OFF Voltage
3.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time
1.0 ms max.
OFF Response Time
1.0 ms max.
No. of Circuits
2 (32 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
120 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
250 g max.
Dimensions
D-shape
Circuit Configuration
COM
1000 pF
Internal
Circuit
IN00
A
CN1
IN07
COM
IN08
820 W
2.7 kW
CN1
IN15
COM
IN00
B
CN2
IN07
COM
IN08
Indicator
switch
circuit
Input indicator
IN15
COM
IN00
A
SW
1000 pF
IN07
COM
IN08
820 W
Internal
Circuit
2.7 kW
IN15
COM
IN00
CN2
B
IN07
COM
IN08
IN15
153
Appendix B
Specifications
Terminal Connections
CN1
I/O word “m+1”
NC
NC
COM
12 VDC
+
A
20
20
19
19
18
18
0
1
NC
2
COM
17
15
14
16
16
14
13
15
15
13
14
14
12
12
I/O word “m+2”
NC
17
11
13
13
11
10
12
12
10
3
12 VDC
4
12 VDC
+
+
5
6
7
COM
9
11
11
9
8
8
10
10
8
9
7
+
I/O word “m”
B
15
COM
12 VDC
CN2
10
COM
9
9
8
8
7
6
7
7
6
5
6
6
5
4
5
5
4
3
4
4
3
2
3
3
2
1
2
2
1
0
1
1
0
11
12 VDC
12
12 VDC
+
+
13
14
I/O word “m+3”
A
B
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
0
1
2
3
5
7
COM
8
9
10
11
12 VDC
12
13
+
14
16
17
17
18
18
NC
19
19
NC
NC
20
20
NC
COM
+
6
16
15
12 VDC
4
15
COM
Note 1. I/O word “m” is determined by the I/O number setting (m = IR 030 + 2 × I/O number). For the C200HX/
C200HG/C200HX/C200HW PC (0 to F Unit), the I/O word is as follows;
0 to 9 Unit: m= IR 030 + 2 × I/O number
A to F Unit: m= IR 330 + 2 × (I/O number – A)
2. The power can be supplied in either polarity, but the same polarity must be used for all COM terminals in
each connector. Connect power supply wiring to every COM terminal, even though the COM terminals in
each connector are connected internally.
154
Appendix B
Specifications
DC Input Unit C200H-ID216 (32 Points)
Rated Input Voltage
24 VDC
Operating Input Voltage
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance
5.6 kW
Input Current
4.1 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage
14.4 VDC min.
OFF Voltage
5.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time
1.0 ms max.
OFF Response Time
1.0 ms max.
No. of Circuits
1 (32 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
All 32 points cannot be turned ON simultaneously
at high temperatures. Refer to the following graph.
100 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
180 g max.
Dimensions
C-shape
Circuit Configuration and Simultaneously Usable Points
Input Voltage:
26.4 VDC
32
30
COM
1000 pF
IN00
IN07
COM
IN08
25
680 W
5.6 kW
Input indicator
IN15
Internal
Circuit
COM
1000 pF
IN00
B
IN07
COM
IN08
680 W
20
15
10
5
5.6 kW
Input indicator
IN15
Simultaneously Usable Points
A
0
0
10
20
30
40
50 55 60
Ambient Temperature (°C)
155
Appendix B
Specifications
Terminal Connections
I/O word “m”
0
1
2
3
24 VDC
4
+
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
0
1
2
3
5
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
NC
19
19
NC
NC
20
20
NC
7
COM
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
COM
24 VDC
4
6
6
+
B
5
5
24 VDC
I/O word “m+1”
A
+
5
6
7
COM
8
9
10
11
24 VDC
12
+
13
14
15
COM
Note 1. I/O word “m” is determined by the I/O number setting (m = IR 030 + 2 × I/O number).
2. The power can be supplied in either polarity, but the same polarity must be used for all COM terminals.
Connect power supply wiring to every COM terminal, even though the COM terminals are connected
internally.
DC Input Unit C200H-ID217 (64 Points)
156
Rated Input Voltage
24 VDC
Operating Input Voltage
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance
5.6 kW
Input Current
4.1 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage
14.4 VDC min.
OFF Voltage
5.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time
1.0 ms max.
OFF Response Time
1.0 ms max.
No. of Circuits
2 (32 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
All 64 points cannot be turned ON simultaneously
at high temperatures. Refer to the following graph.
120 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
250 g max.
Dimensions
D-shape
Appendix B
Specifications
Circuit Configuration and Simultaneously Usable Points
COM
1000 pF
Internal
Circuit
IN00
680 W
IN07
COM
IN08
CN1
IN07
COM
IN08
Indicator
switch
circuit
Input indicator
1000 pF
IN07
COM
IN08
Internal
Circuit
680 W
50
40
30
20
10
5.6 kW
CN2
Input Voltage:
26.4 VDC
SW
CN2
IN15
COM
IN00
A
64
60
5.6 kW
IN15
COM
IN00
B
Input Voltage:
24.0 VDC
Simultaneously Usable Points
CN1
A
IN15
COM
IN00
0
0
B
10
IN07
COM
IN08
20
30
40
50 55 60
Ambient Temperature (°C)
IN15
Terminal Connections
CN1
I/O word “m+1”
A
NC
20
20
NC
NC
19
19
NC
COM
15
24 VDC
+
18
17
17
I/O word “m+2”
0
1
2
COM
15
16
16
14
13
15
15
13
12
14
14
12
11
13
13
11
3
24 VDC
4
24 VDC
+
+
5
6
7
COM
10
12
12
10
9
11
11
9
8
10
10
8
9
9
9
COM
7
+
18
14
8
24 VDC
I/O word “m”
B
8
8
6
7
7
6
5
6
6
5
5
5
4
4
3
4
3
4
2
3
3
2
1
2
2
1
1
0
0
1
10
COM
7
11
24 VDC
12
24 VDC
+
+
CN2
A
B
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
I/O word “m+3”
0
1
2
3
5
7
COM
8
9
10
11
14
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
NC
19
19
NC
NC
20
20
NC
15
COM
24 VDC
12
15
14
+
6
14
13
24 VDC
4
13
+
14
15
COM
Note 1. I/O word “m” is determined by the I/O number setting (m = IR 030 + 2 × I/O number).
2. The power can be supplied in either polarity, but the same polarity must be used for all COM terminals in
each connector. Connect power supply wiring to every COM terminal, even though the COM terminals in
each connector are connected internally.
157
Appendix B
Specifications
DC Input Unit C200H-ID218
Rated Input Voltage
24 VDC +10%/–15%
Input Impedance
3.9 kΩ
Input Current
6 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage/ON Current
15.4 VDC min./3.5 mA min.
OFF Voltage/OFF Current
5.0 VDC max./1 mA max.
ON Response Time
1.0 ms max.
OFF Response Time
1.0 ms max.
No. of Circuits
32 (32 points/common)
Note The number of points that can be ON simultaneously is limited according to the ambient
temperature. Refer to the following diagram
for details.
Internal Current Consumption
100 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
180 g max.
Circuit Configuration
Ambient Temperature for Simultaneously ON Points
0.01 µF
Input voltage: 24.0 VDC
Internal circuit
470 Ω
3.9 kΩ
to
Input LED indicator
0.01 µF
to
470 Ω
Simultaneously ON points
to
Input voltage: 26.4 VDC
3.9 kΩ
to
Input LED indicator
Ambient temperature
Terminal Connections
m words
158
m + 1 words
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
Appendix B
Specifications
Note 1. The polarity of the input power supply can be either positive or negative. The polarity of all commons,
however, must be the same.
2. COM terminals must all be wired even though they are connected internally.
DC Input Unit C200H-ID219
Rated Input Voltage
24 VDC +10%/–15%
Input Impedance
3.9 kΩ
Input Current
6 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage/ON Current
15.4 VDC min./3.5 mA min.
OFF Voltage/OFF Current
5.0 VDC max./1 mA max.
ON Response Time
1.0 ms max.
OFF Response Time
1.0 ms max.
No. of Circuits
64 (32 points/common)
Note The number of points that can be ON simultaneously is limited according to the ambient
temperature. Refer to the following diagram
for details.
Internal Current Consumption
120 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
250 g max.
470 Ω
3.9 kΩ
to
to
Input LED indicator
0.01 µF
to
470 Ω
to
3.9 kΩ
Internal circuit
to
Input LED indicator
Ambient Temperature for Simultaneously ON Points
Input voltage: 20.4 VDC
Input voltage: 24.0 VDC
Simultaneously ON points
0.01 µF
to
Internal circuit
Circuit Configuration
Input voltage: 26.4 VDC
to
to
Ambient temperature
159
Appendix B
Specifications
Terminal Connections
(m + 1) words
(m + 1) words
(m + 2) words
(m + 3) words
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
Note 1. The polarity of the input power supply can be either positive or negative. The polarity of all commons for
CN1 and CN2, however, must be the same.
2. COM terminals for CN1 and CN2 must all be wired even though they are connected internally.
Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD218 (32 Points)
160
Max. Switching Capacity
16 mA 4.5 VDC to 100 mA 26.4 VDC (see below)
Min. Switching Capacity
None
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
0.8 V max.
ON Response Time
0.1 ms max.
OFF Response Time
0.4 ms max.
No. of Circuits
1 (32 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
180 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating
3.5 A (The fuse is not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply
Weight
110 mA 5 to 24 VDC10% min.
(3.4 mA × number of ON pts)
180 g max.
Dimensions
C-shape
Appendix B
Specifications
Circuit Configuration and Maximum Switching Capacity
Units manufactured on or before January 28, 2000
(manufacturing numbers 2810 or earlier*)
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT00
OUT07
COM
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
A
100
OUT08
OUT15
Output
indicator
COM
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
Fuse
(3.5 A)
OUT00
OUT07
COM
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
F indicator
Fuse
blowout
detection circuit
B
OUT08
OUT15
COM
Max. Switching Capacity (mA/pt)
Internal
Circuit
Output
indicator
50
16
0
0
4.5
10
20.4 26.4
Power Supply Voltage (V)
Units manufactured between January 31, 2000 and
October 9, 2002 (manufacturing numbers 3110 to 09X2)
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT00
OUT07
Internal
Circuit
Output
indicator
COM
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
A
OUT08
OUT15
Output
indicator
COM
4.5 to 26.4
VDC
Fuse
(3.5 A)
F indicator
Fuse
blowout
detection circuit
OUT00
OUT07
COM
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
B
OUT08
OUT15
COM
161
Appendix B
Specifications
*Manufacturing Numbers
jjY9j
Manufacturing plant code (A to Z or blank)
Year: Last digit of calendar year; e.g., 1999→9, 2000→0
Month: 1 to 9 (January to September), X (October), Y (November), Z (December)
Day: 01 to 31
162
Appendix B
Specifications
Terminal Connections
I/O word “m”
L
L
L
L
+
L
L
L
L
I/O word “m+1”
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM
L
L
L
L
+
L
L
L
L
COM
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
16
15
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
L
L
L
L
L
+
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
L
L
L
COM
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
L
L
L
L
L
+
L
L
L
COM
Note 1. I/O word “m” is determined by the I/O number setting (m = IR 030 + 2 × I/O number).
2. When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and the error flag in AR 02 corresponding to the I/O number is
turned ON. I/O numbers 0 to 9 correspond to AR 0205 to AR 0214. For the C200HX/C200HG/C200HX/
C200HW PC (0 to F Unit), the following AR and IR bits turn ON;
0 to 9 Unit: AR 0205 to AR 0214 and IR 28000 to IR 28009 turn ON.
A to F Unit: IR 28010 to IR 28015 turn ON.
3. The interruption of power from the external power supply is treated the same as a fuse blowout.
4. Connect power supply wiring to every COM terminal, even though the COM terminals are connected
internally.
5. When wiring output circuits, be sure to use the correct polarity for the external power supplies. Wiring
with incorrect polarity may result in erroneous operation of the load.
163
Appendix B
Specifications
Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD219 (64 Points)
Max. Switching Capacity
16 mA 4.5 VDC to 100 mA 26.4 VDC (see below)
Min. Switching Capacity
None
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
0.8 V max.
ON Response Time
0.1 ms max.
OFF Response Time
0.4 ms max.
No. of Circuits
2 (32 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
270 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuses
Weight
Two 3.5 A fuses (1 fuse/common)
The fuses are not user-replacable.
220 mA 5 to 24 VDC10% min.
(3.4 mA × number of ON pts)
250 g max.
Dimensions
D-shape
Power for External Supply
164
Appendix B
Specifications
Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before January 28, 2000
(manufacturing numbers 2810 or earlier*)
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT00
Internal
Circuit
OUT07
COM
Fuse
CN1
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT08
Indicator
switch/
fuse
blowout
detection
circuit
SW
Output indicator
OUT15
COM
CN1
CN2
F indicator
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT00
Internal
Circuit
OUT07
COM
Fuse
CN2
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT08
OUT15
COM
Units manufactured between January 29, 2000 and
October 10, 2002 (manufacturing numbers 2910 to 10X2)
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT00
Internal
Circuit
OUT07
COM
Fuse
CN1
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT08
Indicator
switch/
fuse
blowout
detection
circuit
SW
Output indicator
OUT15
COM
CN1
CN2
F indicator
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT00
Internal
Circuit
OUT07
COM
Fuse
CN2
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT08
OUT15
COM
165
Appendix B
Specifications
*Manufacturing Numbers
jjY9j
Manufacturing plant code (A to Z or blank)
Year: Last digit of calendar year; e.g., 1999→9, 2000→0
Month: 1 to 9 (January to September), X (October), Y (November), Z (December)
Day: 01 to 31
100
50
16
0
0
4.5
10
20.4 26.4
Power Supply Voltage (V)
166
Max. Switching Capacity (A/unit)
Max. Switching Capacity (mA/pt)
Maximum Switching Capacity
6.4
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
0
0
10
20
30
40
505560
Ambient Temperature (°C)
Appendix B
Specifications
Terminal Connections
CN1
I/O word “m+1”
COM
L
L
L
+
L
L
L
L
L
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
COM
L
L
L
+
L
L
L
L
L
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CN2
I/O word “m”
B
A
20
20
19
19
18
18
17
17
16
16
15
15
14
14
13
13
12
12
11
11
10
10
9
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
I/O word “m+2”
L
COM
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
L
L
L
L
L
+
L
L
+
L
L
L
L
L
L
5
4
3
2
1
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
L
COM
6
1
COM
L
L
7
0
L
L
L
L
L
+
L
L
L
L
L
L
+
L
L
L
L
COM
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
I/O word “m+3”
A
B
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
L
L
L
L
L
+
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
L
L
L
COM
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
L
L
L
L
L
+
L
L
L
COM
Note 1. I/O word “m” is determined by the I/O number setting (m = IR 030 + 2 × I/O number).
2. When either fuse blows, the F indicator lights and the error flag in AR 02 corresponding to the I/O number
is turned ON. I/O numbers 0 to 9 correspond to AR 0205 to AR 0214.
3. The interruption of power from the external power supply is treated the same as a fuse blowout.
4. Connect power supply wiring to every COM terminal, even though the COM terminals in each connector
are connected internally.
5. When wiring output circuits, be sure to use the correct polarity for the external power supplies. Wiring
with incorrect polarity may result in erroneous operation of the load.
167
Appendix B
Specifications
Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD21B (32 Points)
(Load Short-circuit Protection Provided)
Max. Switching Current
0.5 A 24 VDC +10%/–15% (5 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Current
None
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
0.8 V max.
ON Response Time
0.1 ms max.
OFF Response Time
0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits
32 (32 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
180 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuses
Weight
One 7 A fuse (1 fuse/common)
The fuses are not user-replacable.
160 mA 24 VDC +10%/–15% min.
(5 mA × number of ON pts)
180 g max.
Alarm Indicator
Lamp F lights (unless fuse is broken).
Load Short-circuit Prevention
(see note 1)
Dimensions
Detection current: 0.7 to 2.5 A
Automatic restart after error clearance.
C-shape
Power for External Supply
Note When the short-circuit/overload protection is activated for a contact point, the output for that point is turned
OFF. At the same time, lamp “F” lights up, and the alarm from AR0205 to AR0214 corresponding to the I/O
number turns ON. After the cause of the error has been removed, the alarm will be cleared automatically
when the internal temperature of the element drops.
to
0V
Output LED
indicator
to
Alarm
LED
indicator
0V
Short-circuit
protection
circuit
Internal circuit
Short-circuit
protection
circuit
Circuit Configuration
to
0V
Output LED
indicator
to
0V
168
Appendix B
Specifications
Terminal Connections
I/O word “m”
I/O word “m+1”
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)
TTL Input Unit C200H-ID501 (32 Points)
Rated Input Voltage
5 VDC
Operating Input Voltage
4.5 to 5.5 VDC
Input Impedance
1.1 kW
Input Current
3.5 mA (at 5 VDC)
ON Voltage
3.0 VDC min.
OFF Voltage
1.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
OFF Response Time
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
No. of Circuits
4 (8 points/common)
High-speed Inputs
Internal Current Consumption
8 points (connector 2 terminals 8 to 15, when set)
Pulse width: 1 ms/4 ms min. (switchable)
130 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
300 g max.
Dimensions
130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)
Circuit Configuration
COM0
IN00
CN1
IN07
COM1
IN08
2.4 kW
1.1 kW
IN15
Internal
Circuit
COM2
IN00
CN2
IN07
COM3
IN08
2.4 kW
1.1 kW
IN15
169
Appendix B
Specifications
Terminal Connections
CN1
CN2
I/O word “n”
NC
B
12
A
12
NC
0
NC
11
11
NC
1
NC
2
NC
COM1
15
14
5 VDC
+
+
I/O word “n+1”
10
9
8
7
10
9
COM0
8
7
7
6
13
6
6
5
12
5
5
4
4
3
11
4
10
3
3
2
9
2
2
1
8
1
1
0
3
5 VDC
+
4
+
5 VDC
+
5
6
B
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
8
9
10
11
13
+
+
14
7
8
8
9
9
NC
10
10
NC
NC
11
11
NC
NC
12
12
NC
COM2
5 VDC
12
7
7
+
A
15
COM3
Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number). For the C200HX/
C200HG/C200HX/C200HW PC (0 to F Unit), the I/O word is as follows.
0 to 9 Unit: n= IR 100 + 10 × unit number
A to F Unit: n= IR 400 + 10 × (unit number – A)
2. When pin 2 of the Unit’s DIP switch is ON, input points 08 to 15 in connector 2 are high-speed inputs.
170
Appendix B
Specifications
DC Input Unit C200H-ID215 (32 Points)
Rated Input Voltage
24 VDC
Operating Input Voltage
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance
5.6 kW
Input Current
4.1 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage
14.4 VDC min.
OFF Voltage
5.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable; at 24 VDC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable; at 24 VDC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits
4 (8 points/common)
High-speed Inputs
Internal Current Consumption
8 points (connector 2 terminals 8 to 15, when set)
Pulse width: 1 ms/4 ms min. (switchable)
130 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
300 g max.
Dimensions
130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)
Circuit Configuration
COM0
1000 pF
IN00
CN1
IN07
COM1
IN08
620 W
5.6 kW
IN15
Internal
Circuit
COM2
1000 pF
IN00
CN2
IN07
COM3
IN08
620 W
5.6 kW
IN15
Terminal Connections
CN1
CN2
I/O word “n”
NC
0
11
11
NC
NC
10
10
NC
2
14
+
NC
NC
15
+
A
12
1
COM1
24 VDC
B
12
I/O word “n+1”
9
8
7
9
COM0
8
7
7
6
13
6
6
5
12
5
5
4
11
4
4
3
3
2
10
3
9
2
2
1
8
1
1
0
24 VDC
3
+
4
+
24 VDC
+
5
6
B
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
6
5
6
8
9
10
11
13
+
+
14
7
8
8
9
9
NC
10
10
NC
NC
11
11
NC
NC
12
12
NC
COM2
24 VDC
12
7
7
+
A
15
COM3
Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number).
2. When pin 2 of the Unit’s DIP switch is ON, input points 08 to 15 in connector 2 are high-speed inputs.
3. At high temperatures, the number of inputs that can be turned ON simultaneously is limited. Refer to the
graphs on the following page for details.
171
Appendix B
Specifications
Usable I/O Points (C200H-ID215)
To prevent overheating in the C200H-ID215 that can cause early failure of internal components, limit the number of
input points that are ON simultaneously. As shown below, the number of points that can be on simultaneously
depends on both the temperature and the input voltage.
For example, 22 pts with input voltage of 24.0 VDC can be ON at 55°C, but only 16 pts with input voltage of
26.4 VDC can be ON at 55°C. At 24.0 VDC, all 32 input pts can be ON up to 43°C, but at 26.4 VDC all 32 input pts
can be ON up to 34°C.
Input Voltage: 26.4 VDC
32
30
Input Voltage: 24.0 VDC
Input Voltage:
24.0 VDC; 55°C,
22 points ON
Simultaneously Usable Inputs
22
20
16
Input Voltage:
24.0 VDC; 55°C,
16 points ON
10
Input Voltage:
24.0 VDC; 34°C,
32 points ON
Input Voltage:
24.0 VDC; 43°C,
32 points ON
0
0
10
20
3034 4043 50
Ambient Temperature (°C)
55 60
Note If the Unit is at room temperature it takes about 10 minutes for excessive heat to build up when all inputs are
turned ON, so all inputs can be turned ON simultaneously for testing.
172
Appendix B
Specifications
TTL Output Unit C200H-OD501 (Used as a 32-point Output Unit)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
5 VDC 35 mA (280 mA/common, 1.12 A/Unit;
output resistance 4.7 kW)
None
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
0.4 V max.
ON Response Time
0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time
0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits
4 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
220 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuses
4 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply
39 mA 5 VDC min. (1.2 mA × no. of outputs ON)
Weight
300 g max.
Dimensions
130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)
173
Appendix B
Specifications
Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 13, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 13Y2 or earlier)
5 VDC
4.7 kW
OUT00
OUT07
CN1
COM0
Fuse
5 VDC
OUT08
OUT15
COM1
5 VDC
Internal
Circuit
4.7 kW
OUT00
OUT07
CN2
COM2
Fuse
5 VDC
OUT08
OUT15
COM3
174
Appendix B
Specifications
Terminal Connections
CN1
CN2
I/O word “n”
NC
NC
+5 VDC
COM1
L
L
5 VDC
L
+
L
L
L
L
L
15
14
13
12
11
B
12
A
12
11
11
10
10
I/O word “n+1”
L
NC
8
8
7
7
7
6
6
6
5
5
5
4
4
4
3
10
3
3
2
9
2
2
1
8
1
1
0
L
5 VDC
4
L
5
L
6
L
L
L
3
L
+
L
2
L
5 VDC
COM0
9
1
L
NC
+5 VDC
9
0
+
L
7
L
COM2
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
8
L
9
L
10
L
11
L
12
L
13
5 VDC
+
L
14
L
15
L
COM3
9
9
10
NC
11
11
NC
NC
12
12
NC
L
L
B
10
+5 VDC
L
A
+5 VDC
Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number).
2. The Unit will have 32 static output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is OFF.
3. The outputs are negative logic outputs; when there is an output, the terminal has an “L” voltage level.
Each output terminal has an output resistance of 4.7 kW.
TTL Output Unit C200H-OD501 (Used as 128-point Dynamic Output Unit)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
5 VDC 35 mA (280 mA/common, 1.12 A/Unit;
output resistance 4.7 kW)
None
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
0.4 V max.
ON Response Time
0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time
0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits
2 (dynamic, 64 points/circuit)
Internal Current Consumption
220 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuses
4 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply
39 mA 5 VDC min. (1.2 mA × no. of outputs ON)
Weight
300 g max.
Dimensions
130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)
175
Appendix B
Specifications
Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 13, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 13Y2 or earlier)
5 VDC
4.7 kW
DATA00
DATA07
COM0
Fuse
CN1
5 VDC
4.7 kW
Internal
Circuit
STB00
STB07
Fuse
COM1
5 VDC
DATA08
DATA15
COM2
CN2
5 VDC
STB08
STB15
COM3
176
Appendix B
Specifications
Terminal Connections
CN1
NC
B
12
A
12
NC
NC
11
11
NC
+V1
10
10
+V0
9
9
STB7
8
8
DATA7
STB6
7
7
DATA6
STB5
6
6
DATA5
STB4
5
5
DATA4
STB3
4
4
DATA3
STB2
3
3
DATA2
STB1
2
2
DATA1
STB0
1
1
DATA0
COM1
CN2
+
5 VDC
COM0
A
B
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
NC
11
11
NC
NC
12
12
NC
DATA8
Strobe
input
Output device
(such as a numeric display)
DATA9
DATA10
Data
input
Data
input
DATA11
DATA12
DATA13
Strobe
input
Output device
(such as a numeric display)
DATA14
DATA15
COM2
+
+V2
5 VDC
STB8
STB9
STB10
STB11
STB12
STB13
STB14
STB15
COM3
+V3
Note 1. Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on I/O bit allocation.
2. The Unit will have 128 dynamic output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is ON.
3. Set pin 5 of the Unit’s DIP switch ON for positive logic outputs, or OFF for negative logic outputs. When
set for negative logic outputs, the terminal has an “L” voltage level when there is an output. When set for
positive logic outputs, the terminal has an “H” voltage level when there is an output.
4. The strobe signal has negative logic regardless of the setting of pin 5.
5. Each output terminal has an output resistance of 4.7 kW.
Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD215 (Used as 32-point Output Unit)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
16 mA, 4.5 VDC to 100 mA, 26.4 VDC
800 mA/common, 3.2 A/Unit
None
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
0.7 V max.
ON Response Time
0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time
0.6 ms max.
No. of Circuits
4 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
220 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuses
4 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply
Weight
90 mA 5 to 24 VDC10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)
300 g max.
Dimensions
130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)
177
Appendix B
Specifications
Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 29, 1999
(manufacturing numbers 29Y9 or earlier*)
Units manufactured between November 30, 1999 and
October 9, 2002 (manufacturing numbers 30Y9 to 09X2)
5 to
24 VDC
5 to
24 VDC
OUT00
OUT00
OUT07
10 kΩ
8.2 kΩ
Fuse
Internal
Circuit
COM0
5 to
24 VDC
OUT07
CN1
6.8 kΩ
15 kΩ
Fuse
Internal
Circuit
OUT08
OUT15
COM1
5 to
24 VDC
OUT00
OUT07
8.2 kΩ
Fuse
COM2
5 to
24 VDC
OUT08
CN1
OUT15
COM1
5 to
24 VDC
OUT00
10 kΩ
COM0
5 to
24 VDC
OUT08
OUT07
CN2
6.8 kΩ
15 kΩ
OUT15
COM3
Fuse
COM2
5 to
24 VDC
OUT08
CN2
OUT15
COM3
*Manufacturing Numbers
jjY9j
Manufacturing plant code (A to Z or blank)
Year: Last digit of calendar year; e.g., 1999→9, 2000→0
Month: 1 to 9 (January to September), X (October), Y (November), Z (December)
Day: 01 to 31
178
Appendix B
Specifications
Terminal Connections
CN1
CN2
I/O word “n”
NC
NC
+5 to 24 VDC
COM1
L
L
5 to 24
VDC
L
+
L
L
L
L
L
15
14
13
12
11
B
12
A
12
11
11
10
10
I/O word “n+1”
L
NC
8
8
7
7
7
6
6
6
5
5
5
4
4
4
3
10
3
3
2
9
2
2
1
8
1
1
0
L
L
5 to 24
VDC
L
L
2
L
5 to 24
VDC
COM0
9
1
L
NC
+5 to 24 VDC
9
0
+
L
3
L
+
4
L
5
L
6
L
7
L
COM2
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
8
L
9
L
10
L
11
L
12
L
13
5 to 24
+VDC
L
14
L
15
L
COM3
9
9
10
NC
11
11
NC
NC
12
12
NC
L
L
B
10
+5 to 24 VDC
L
A
+5 to 24 VDC
Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number).
2. The Unit will have 32 static output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is OFF.
3. When wiring output circuits, be sure to use the correct polarity for the external power supplies. Wiring
with incorrect polarity may result in erroneous operation of the load.
Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD215
(Used as 128-point Dynamic Output Unit)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
16 mA, 4.5 VDC to 100 mA, 26.4 VDC
800 mA/common, 3.2 A/Unit
None
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
0.7 V max.
ON Response Time
0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time
0.6 ms max.
No. of Circuits
2 (dynamic, 64 points/circuit)
Internal Current Consumption
220 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuses
4 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply
Weight
90 mA 5 to 24 VDC10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)
300 g max.
Dimensions
130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)
179
Appendix B
Specifications
Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 29, 1999
(manufacturing numbers 29Y9 or earlier*)
Units manufactured between November 30, 1999 and
October 9, 2002 (manufacturing numbers 30Y9 to 09X2)
5 to
24 VDC
5 to
24 VDC
DATA00
DATA00
DATA07
DATA07
10 kΩ
6.8 kΩ
COM0
8.2 kΩ
Fuse
COM0
CN1
5 to
24 VDC
Internal
Circuit
15 kΩ
Fuse
STB00
STB00
STB07
10 kΩ
8.2 kΩ
Fuse
STB07
6.8 kΩ
COM1
5 to
24 VDC
DATA08
DATA15
COM2
5 to
24 VDC
STB08
CN1
5 to
24 VDC
Internal
Circuit
15 kΩ
CN2
STB15
COM3
Fuse
COM1
5 to
24 VDC
DATA08
DATA15
COM2
5 to
24 VDC
STB08
CN2
STB15
COM3
*Manufacturing Numbers
jjY9j
Manufacturing plant code (A to Z or blank)
Year: Last digit of calendar year; e.g., 1999→9, 2000→0
Month: 1 to 9 (January to September), X (October), Y (November), Z (December)
Day: 01 to 31
180
Appendix B
Specifications
Terminal Connections
CN1
NC
B
12
A
12
NC
NC
11
11
NC
+V1
10
10
+V0
9
9
STB7
8
8
DATA7
STB6
7
7
DATA6
STB5
6
6
DATA5
STB4
5
5
DATA4
STB3
4
4
DATA3
STB2
3
3
DATA2
STB1
2
2
DATA1
STB0
1
1
DATA0
COM1
CN2
5 to 24 VDC
+
COM0
B
A
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
NC
11
11
NC
NC
12
12
NC
DATA8
Output device
(such as a numeric display)
Data
input
Strobe
input
DATA9
DATA10
Data
input
DATA11
DATA12
DATA13
Strobe
input
Output device
(such as a numeric display)
DATA14
DATA15
COM2
+
+V2
5 to 24 VDC
STB8
STB9
STB10
STB11
STB12
STB13
STB14
STB15
COM3
+V3
Note 1. Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on I/O bit allocation.
2. The Unit will have 128 dynamic output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is ON.
3. Set pin 5 of the Unit’s DIP switch ON for positive logic outputs, or OFF for negative logic outputs. When
set for negative logic outputs, the terminal has an “L” voltage level when there is an output. When set for
positive logic outputs, the terminal has an “H” voltage level when there is an output.
4. The strobe signal has negative logic regardless of the setting of pin 5.
5. When the output device (such as a numeric display) does not have a pull-up resistor, it is necessary to
add a pull-up resistor between the + terminal of the power supply and each data (0 to 15) and strobe (0 to
15) terminal.
6. When wiring output circuits, be sure to use the correct polarity for the external power supplies. Wiring
with incorrect polarity may result in erroneous operation of the load.
181
Appendix B
Specifications
High-density I/O Unit Limitations
Limitations on the switching capacity of C200H-OD215/MD115/MD215 Transistor Output Units and the usable
number of I/O points in the C200H-ID215 and C200H-MD215 are shown below.
Switching Capacity
The switching capacity of C200H-OD215/MD115/MD215 Transistor Output Units depends on the power supply
voltage, as shown below.
Max. Switching Capacity (mA/pt)
100
50
16
0
0
4.5
10
20.4
26.4
Power Supply Voltage (V)
TTL I/O Unit C200H-MD501
(Used as I/O Unit with 16 Inputs and 16 Outputs)
Output Specifications
(Connector 1)
Input Specifications
(Connector 2)
General Specifications
182
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
5 VDC 35 mA (280 mA/common, 560 mA/Unit;
output resistance 4.7 kW)
None
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
0.4 V max.
ON Response Time
0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time
0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits
2 (8 points/common)
Fuses
2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply
20 mA 5 VDC min. (1.2 mA × no. of outputs ON)
Rated Input Voltage
5 VDC
Operating Input Voltage
4.5 to 5.5 VDC
Input Impedance
1.1 kW
Input Current
3.5 mA (at 5 VDC)
ON Voltage
3.0 VDC min.
OFF Voltage
1.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
OFF Response Time
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
No. of Circuits
2 (8 points/common)
High-speed Inputs
8 points (connector 2 terminals 8 to 15, when set)
Pulse width: 1 ms/4 ms min. (switchable)
Internal Current Consumption
180 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
300 g max.
Dimensions
130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)
Appendix B
Specifications
Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 21, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 21Y2 or earlier)
5 VDC
4.7 kW
OUT00
OUT07
CN1 (Output)
COM0
Fuse
5 VDC
OUT08
Internal
Circuit
1.1 kW
OUT15
COM1
IN00
IN07
2.4 kW
COM2
IN08
CN2 (Input)
IN15
COM3
183
Appendix B
Specifications
Terminal Connections
CN1
CN2
I/O word “n”
NC
NC
+5 VDC
COM1
L
L
5 VDC
L
+
L
L
L
B
12
A
12
11
11
10
10
9
9
NC
NC
+5 VDC
COM0
15
8
8
7
14
7
7
6
13
6
6
5
12
5
5
4
11
4
4
3
10
3
3
2
L
L
I/O word “n+1”
A
B
0
8
1
1
9
1
2
2
10
2
3
3
11
3
4
4
12
4
5
5
13
5
6
6
14
6
7
7
15
7
8
8
9
2
2
1
8
1
1
0
5 VDC
+
L
L
5 VDC
+
L
L
+
COM2
L
5 VDC
+
+
COM3
9
9
10
10
NC
L
NC
L
NC
11
11
NC
L
NC
12
12
NC
I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number).
The Unit will have 16 static output and16 static input points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is OFF.
When pin 2 of the Unit’s DIP switch is ON, input points 08 to 15 in connector 2 are high-speed inputs.
The outputs are negative logic outputs; when there is an output, the terminal has an “L” voltage level.
Each output terminal has an output resistance of 4.7 kW.
5. The user is not authorized to change the fuse.
Note 1.
2.
3.
4.
TTL I/O Unit C200H-MD501 (Used as 128-point Dynamic Input Unit)
Output Specifications
(Connector 1)
Input Specifications
(Connector 2)
General Specifications
184
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
5 VDC 35 mA (280 mA/common, 560 mA/Unit;
output resistance 4.7 kW)
None
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
0.4 V max.
ON Response Time
0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time
0.3 ms max.
Fuses
2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply
20 mA 5 VDC min. (1.2 mA × no. of outputs ON)
Rated Input Voltage
5 VDC
Operating Input Voltage
4.5 to 5.5 VDC
Input Impedance
1.1 kW
Input Current
3.5 mA (at 5 VDC)
ON Voltage
3.0 VDC min.
OFF Voltage
1.0 VDC max.
No. of Circuits
2 (dynamic, 64 points/circuit)
Internal Current Consumption
180 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
300 g max.
Dimensions
130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)
Appendix B
Specifications
Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 21, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 21Y2 or eariler)
5 VDC
4.7 kW
STB00
STB07
CN1
COM0
Fuse
5 VDC
STB08
Internal
Circuit
1.1 kW
STB15
COM1
DATA00
DATA07
2.4 kW
COM2
DATA08
CN2
DATA15
COM3
185
Appendix B
Specifications
Terminal Connections
CN1
NC
NC
5 VDC
+V1
+
COM1
B
12
11
10
9
CN2
A
12
11
10
9
5 VDC
COM0
Keyboard, thumbwheel switch, etc.
7
STB6
6
STB5
DATA6
5
STB4
DATA7
4
STB10 3
STB9
2
4
STB3
COM2
3
STB2
2
STB1
STB8
1
STB0
STB11
1
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
NC
DATA3
STB7
STB13 6
STB12 5
2
DATA2
+
8
STB15 8
STB14 7
B
1
DATA1
NC
+V0
A
1
DATA0
NC
DATA4
DATA5
NC
DATA8
DATA9
DATA10
DATA11
DATA12
DATA13
DATA14
DATA15
COM3
NC
11
11
NC
NC
12
12
NC
Keyboard, thumbwheel switch, etc.
Note 1. Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on I/O bit allocation.
2. The Unit will have 128 dynamic output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is ON.
3. Each output terminal has an output resistance of 4.7 kW.
12 VDC Input/Transistor Output Unit C200H-MD115
(Used as I/O Unit with 16 Inputs and 16 Outputs)
Output Specifications
(Connector 1)
Input Specifications
(Connector 2)
186
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
16 mA, 4.5 VDC to 100 mA, 26.4 VDC
800 mA/common, 1.6 A/Unit
None
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
0.7 V max.
ON Response Time
0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time
0.6 ms max.
No. of Circuits
2 (8 points/common)
Fuses
2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply
45 mA 5 to 24 VDC10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)
Rated Input Voltage
12 VDC +10%/–15%
Operating Input Voltage
10.2 to 13.2 VDC
Input Impedance
2.7 kW
Input Current
4.1 mA (at 12 VDC)
ON Voltage
8.0 VDC min.
OFF Voltage
3.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
OFF Response Time
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
No. of Circuits
2 (8 points/common)
High-speed Inputs
8 points (connector 2 terminals 8 to 15, when set)
Pulse width: 1 ms/4 ms min. (switchable)
Appendix B
Specifications
General Specifications
Internal Current Consumption
180 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
300 g max.
Dimensions
130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)
Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 17, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 17Y2 or eariler)
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
4.7 kW
OUT00
OUT07
CN1
Fuse
Internal
Circuit
2.7 kW
620 W
COM0
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT08
OUT15
COM1
IN00
IN07
1000 pF
COM2
IN08
CN2
IN15
COM3
187
Appendix B
Specifications
Terminal Connections
CN1
CN2
I/O word “n”
NC
NC
+5 to 24 VDC
COM1
L
L
5 to 24
VDC
L
+
L
L
L
B
12
A
12
11
11
10
10
9
9
NC
NC
+5 to 24 VDC
COM0
15
8
8
7
14
7
7
6
13
6
6
5
12
5
5
4
11
4
4
3
10
3
3
2
L
L
I/O word “n+1”
A
B
0
8
1
1
9
1
2
2
10
2
3
3
11
3
4
4
12
4
5
5
13
5
6
6
14
6
7
7
15
7
8
8
9
2
2
1
8
1
1
0
12 VDC
+
L
L
5 to 24
VDC
+
L
L
+
COM2
L
12 VDC
+
+
COM3
9
9
10
10
NC
L
NC
L
NC
11
11
NC
L
NC
12
12
NC
Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number).
2. The Unit will have 16 static output and16 static input points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is OFF.
3. When pin 2 of the Unit’s DIP switch is ON, input points 08 to 15 in connector 2 are high-speed inputs.
12 VDC Input/Transistor Output Unit C200H-MD115
(Used as 128-point Dynamic Input Unit)
Output Specifications
(Connector 1)
Input Specifications
(Connector 2)
General Specifications
188
Max. Switching Capacity
50 mA 12 VDC, 400 mA/common, 0.8 A/Unit
Min. Switching Capacity
None
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
0.7 V max.
ON Response Time
0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time
0.6 ms max.
Fuses
2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply
45 mA 5 to 24 VDC10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)
Rated Input Voltage
12 VDC
Operating Input Voltage
10.2 to 13.2 VDC
Input Impedance
2.7 kW
Input Current
4.1 mA (at 12 VDC)
ON Voltage
8.0 VDC min.
OFF Voltage
3.0 VDC max.
No. of Circuits
2 (dynamic, 64 points/circuit)
Internal Current Consumption
180 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
300 g max.
Dimensions
130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)
Appendix B
Specifications
Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 17, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 17Y2 or earlier)
12 VDC
STB00
STB07
CN1
COM0
Fuse
12 VDC
STB08
Internal
Circuit
2.7 kW
620 W
STB15
COM1
DATA00
DATA07
1000 pF
COM2
DATA08
CN2
DATA15
COM3
189
Appendix B
Specifications
Terminal Connections
CN1
12 VDC
+
CN2
NC
B
12
A
12
NC
NC
11
11
NC
10
+V0
+V1
10
COM1
9
STB15 8
STB14 7
9
A
B
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
NC
10
10
NC
NC
11
11
NC
NC
12
12
NC
DATA0
DATA1
12 VDC
COM0
DATA2
+
DATA3
Keyboard, thumbwheel switch, etc.
8
STB7
7
STB6
6
STB5
DATA6
5
STB4
DATA7
4
4
STB3
COM2
STB10 3
STB9
2
3
STB2
2
STB1
STB8
1
STB0
STB13 6
STB12 5
STB11
1
DATA4
DATA5
DATA8
DATA9
DATA10
DATA11
DATA12
DATA13
DATA14
DATA15
COM3
Keyboard, thumbwheel switch, etc.
Note 1. Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on I/O bit allocation.
2. The Unit will have 128 dynamic output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is ON.
24 VDC Input/Transistor Output Unit C200H-MD215
(Used as I/O Unit with 16 Inputs and 16 Outputs)
Output Specifications
(Connector 1)
Input Specifications
(Connector 2)
General Specifications
190
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
16 mA, 4.5 VDC to 100 mA, 26.4 VDC
800 mA/common, 1.6 A/Unit
None
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
0.7 V max.
ON Response Time
0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time
0.6 ms max.
No. of Circuits
2 (8 points/common)
Fuses
2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply
45 mA 5 to 24 VDC10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)
Rated Input Voltage
24 VDC
Operating Input Voltage
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance
5.6 kW
Input Current
4.1 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage
14.4 VDC min.
OFF Voltage
5.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
OFF Response Time
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
No. of Circuits
2 (8 points/common)
High-speed Inputs
8 points (connector 2 terminals 8 to 15, when set)
Pulse width: 1 ms/4 ms min. (switchable)
Internal Current Consumption
180 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
300 g max.
Dimensions
130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)
Appendix B
Specifications
Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 29, 1999
(manufacturing numbers 29Y9 or earlier*)
Units manufactured between November 30, 1999 and
October 9, 2002 (manufacturing numbers 30Y9 to 09X2)
5 to
24 VDC
5 to
24 VDC
OUT00
OUT00
OUT07
OUT07
CN1
10 kΩ
8.2 kΩ
Fuse
Internal
Circuit
COM0
5 to
24 VDC
15 kΩ
620 W
5.6 kW
IN07
620 W
1,000 pF
CN2
IN15
COM3
COM0
5 to
24 VDC
OUT08
OUT15
COM1
IN00
COM2
IN08
Fuse
Internal
Circuit
OUT08
5.6 kW
CN1
6.8 kΩ
OUT15
COM1
IN00
IN07
1,000 pF
COM2
IN08
CN2
IN15
COM3
*Manufacturing Numbers
jjY9j
Manufacturing plant code (A to Z or blank)
Year: Last digit of calendar year; e.g., 1999→9, 2000→0
Month: 1 to 9 (January to September), X (October), Y (November), Z (December)
Day: 01 to 31
191
Appendix B
Specifications
Terminal Connections
CN1
CN2
I/O word “n”
NC
NC
+5 to 24 VDC
COM1
L
L
5 to 24
VDC
L
+
L
L
L
B
12
A
12
11
11
10
10
9
9
NC
NC
+5 to 24 VDC
COM0
15
8
8
7
14
7
7
6
13
6
6
5
12
5
5
4
11
4
4
3
10
3
3
2
L
L
I/O word “n+1”
A
B
0
8
1
1
1
9
2
2
2
10
3
3
11
3
4
4
12
4
5
5
13
5
6
6
6
14
7
7
15
7
8
8
9
2
2
1
8
1
1
0
24 VDC
+
L
L
5 to 24
VDC
+
L
L
+
COM2
L
24 VDC
+
+
COM3
9
9
10
10
NC
L
NC
L
NC
11
11
NC
L
NC
12
12
NC
Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number).
2. The Unit will have 16 static output and16 static input points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is OFF.
3. At high temperatures, the number of inputs that can be turned ON simultaneously is limited. Refer to the
graph on page 195 for details.
4. When pin 2 of the Unit’s DIP switch is ON, input points 08 to 15 in connector 2 are high-speed inputs.
5. When wiring output circuits, be sure to use the correct polarity for the external power supplies. Wiring
with incorrect polarity may result in erroneous operation of the load.
24 VDC Input/Transistor Output Unit C200H-MD215
(Used as 128-point Dynamic Input Unit)
Output Specifications
(Connector 1)
Input Specifications
(Connector 2)
General Specifications
192
Max. Switching Capacity
100 mA 24 VDC, 800 mA/common, 1.6 A/Unit
Min. Switching Capacity
None
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
0.7 V max.
ON Response Time
0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time
0.6 ms max.
Fuses
2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply
45 mA 5 to 24 VDC10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)
Rated Input Voltage
24 VDC
Operating Input Voltage
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance
5.6 kW
Input Current
4.1 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage
14.4 VDC min.
OFF Voltage
5.0 VDC max.
No. of Circuits
2 (dynamic, 64 points/circuit)
Internal Current Consumption
180 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight
300 g max.
Dimensions
130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)
Appendix B
Specifications
Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 29, 1999
(manufacturing numbers 29Y9 or earlier*)
Units manufactured between November 30, 1999 and
October 9, 2002 (manufacturing numbers 30Y9 to 09X2)
24 VDC
24 VDC
STB00
STB00
STB07
STB07
6.8 kΩ
CN1
10 kΩ
CN1
COM0
8.2 kΩ
COM0
Fuse
15 kΩ
24 VDC
STB08
Internal
Circuit
5.6 kW
620 W
24 VDC
STB08
Internal
Circuit
STB15
COM1
DATA00
5.6 kW
DATA07
620 W
1,000 pF
COM2
DATA08
Fuse
CN2
DATA15
COM3
STB15
COM1
DATA00
DATA07
1,000 pF
COM2
DATA08
CN2
DATA15
COM3
*Manufacturing Numbers
jjY9j
Manufacturing plant code (A to Z or blank)
Year: Last digit of calendar year; e.g., 1999→9, 2000→0
Month: 1 to 9 (January to September), X (October), Y (November), Z (December)
Day: 01 to 31
193
Appendix B
Specifications
Terminal Connections
CN1
12 VDC
+
CN2
NC
B
12
A
12
NC
NC
11
11
NC
10
+V0
+V1
10
COM1
9
STB15 8
STB14 7
9
A
B
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
NC
10
10
NC
NC
11
11
NC
NC
12
12
NC
DATA0
DATA1
12 VDC
COM0
DATA2
+
DATA3
Keyboard,
thumbwheel
switch, etc.
8
STB7
7
STB6
6
STB5
DATA6
5
STB4
DATA7
4
4
STB3
COM2
STB10 3
STB9
2
3
STB2
2
STB1
STB8
1
STB0
STB13 6
STB12 5
STB11
1
DATA4
DATA5
DATA8
DATA9
DATA10
DATA11
DATA12
DATA13
DATA14
DATA15
COM3
Keyboard,
thumbwheel
switch, etc.
Note 1. Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on I/O bit allocation.
2. The Unit will have 128 dynamic output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is ON.
3. Each output terminal has an output resistance of 4.7 kW.
4. At high temperatures, the number of inputs that can be turned ON simultaneously is limited. Refer to the
graph on the next page for details.
5. The user is not authorized to change the fuse.
6. When wiring output circuits, be sure to use the correct polarity for the external power supplies. Wiring
with incorrect polarity may result in erroneous operation of the load.
194
Appendix B
Specifications
High-density I/O Unit Limitations
Limitations on the switching capacity of C200H-OD215/MD115/MD215 Transistor Output Units and the usable
number of I/O points in the C200H-ID215 and C200H-MD215 are shown below.
Switching Capacity
The switching capacity of C200H-OD215/MD115/MD215 Transistor Output Units depends on the power supply
voltage, as shown below.
Max. Switching Capacity (mA/pt)
100
50
16
0
0
4.5
10
20.4
26.4
Power Supply Voltage (V)
Usable I/O Points (C200H-MD215)
To prevent overheating in the C200H-MD215 and prevent early failure of internal components, limit the number of
input points ON simultaneously. The number of points that can be on simultaneously depends on both the temperature and the input voltage. (There is no limit to the number of output points that can be ON simultaneously.)
Input Voltage: 26.4 VDC
16
15
Simultaneously Usable Inputs
Input Voltage:
26.4 VDC; 55°,
11 points ON
Input Voltage: 24.0 VDC
11
10
5
Input Voltage:
26.4 VDC; 43°,
16 points ON
0
0
10
20
3034 4043 50 55 60
Ambient Temperature (°C)
Note If the Unit is at room temperature it takes about 10 minutes for excessive heat to build up when all inputs are
turned ON, so all inputs can be turned ON simultaneously for testing.
195
Appendix B
Specifications
C200HS-INT01 Interrupt Input Unit
The Interrupt Input Unit temporarily interrupts the main program by means of inputs, and executes interrupt subroutines. It must be mounted to a
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE CPU Rack, and a maximum of two Interrupt Input
Units can be mounted on the Rack. (It is possible to mount it to an Expansion I/O
Rack, but in that case it will be treated as a Standard Input Unit and will have no
interrupt functions.) Use a C200HW-BCjj1 Backplane. The word number of
the slot position to which the Unit is mounted is allocated as eight input points.
Operation display area:
Displays the ON/OFF status of interrupts.
Terminal block:
Consists of removable components.
Rated Input Voltage
12 to 24 VDC +10%/–15%
Input Impedance
2 KΩ
Input Current
10 mA typical (24 VDC)
ON Voltage
10.2 VDC min.
OFF Voltage
3.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time
0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time
0.5 ms max.
No. of Circuits
1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption
20 mA, 5 VDC max.
Weight
200 g max.
Circuit Configuration
IN
IN
2 kW
COM
0.01
mF
1.8
kW
Internal
Circuit
12 to 24 VDC
Input indicator
Either plus or minus can be used for the input power supply.
196
Appendix B
Specifications
Terminal Connections
0
1
2
3
12 to 24 VDC
4
5
6
7
COM
NC
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
197
Appendix B
Specifications
Analog Timer Unit C200H-TM001
Item
Specifications
Oscillation Method
CR oscillation
Time Setting Range
Use the DIP switch to set any of the following four ranges, according to the chart shown on
the next page.
0.1 to 1 second (typical)
1 to 10 seconds (typical)
10 to 60 seconds (typical)
1 to 10 minutes (typical)
Timer Pause Function
Number of Timer Points
The timing operation can be paused if so specified by the program. Therefore, the timers can
also be used as cumulative registers.
4
Indicators
SET and TIME UP
External Variable
Resistor
Bit Allocation
External variable resistors can be used to set the time value when the IN/EXT selector is set
to OFF (EXT). Use 20 kW variable resistors.
The word is determined by the system configuration.
Bit
Function
00
T0 start output
01
T1 start output
02
T2 start output
03
T3 start output
04
T0 pause output
05
T1 pause output
0
Operates
06
T2 pause output
1
Stops
07
T3 pause output
08
T0 time-up input
09
T1 time-up input
10
T2 time-up input
11
T3 time-up input
“1” when time is running
“1” when time is up
12
13
Cannot be used
14
15
Programming and
Timing Chart
Timer start input
word n bits 08 through 11
Timer setting
(word n bits 00
through 03)
Time-up output
Time-up flag
Internal Current
Consumption
198
60 mA 5 VDC max.
Timer start
input
Time-up
output
Timer set value
Appendix B
Specifications
Internal variable
resistors
These variable resistors are used to
set the timers. The
settings of these resistors are effective
only when the corresponding IN/EXT
selector is ON. To
set or adjust the
time, use the
screwdriver
supplied with the
Unit. Turn the variable resistor clockwise to increase the
time value. The
numbers 0 through
3 correspond to T0
through T3, respectively.
TM001
Indicators
The SET indicators in the top row light when the corresponding timer is operating. The TIME UP indicators in the bottom row light when the corresponding
timer (T0 through T3) turns ON.
0
1
2
3
Time range setting
Min.
0
1
Max.
External variable resistor connectors
External variable resistors can also be used to set the
timers. The IN/EXT selector pin must be set to the
OFF position. Numbers 0 through 3 correspond to T0
through T3, respectively. Use 20-kW variable resistors
and AWG 22 to 28 lead wires. The connector has solderless terminals and must be wired as shown below.
2
3
IN/EXT selectors
When the internal variable resistor is used, set the corresponding pin to ON; when an external
variable resistor is used, set the
corresponding pin to OFF. Pin
numbers 4 through 1 correspond
to T0 through T3, respectively.
Timers
Pin
0.1 to 1 s
0.1 to 10 s
10 to 60 s
1 to 10 m
T0
8
0
1
0
1
7
0
0
1
1
6
0
1
0
1
5
0
0
1
1
4
0
1
0
1
3
0
0
1
1
2
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
T1
T2
T3
(0: OFF 1: ON)
199
Appendix B
Specifications
External variable
resistor connector
External variable
resistor
! Caution
Ensure that the external variable resistor connectors are open when using the internal variable
resistor.
Standard B7A Interface Unit C200H-B7AI1/B7AO1
The Standard B7A Interface Unit used with the B7A Link Terminal allows the transmission and reception of
16-point I/O data over two wires.
The following Standard B7A Interface Unit and B7A Link Terminal models are available.
B7A Interface Unit
16-point input: C200H-B7AI1
16-point output: C200H-B7AO1
B7A Link Terminals
B7A-T6j1 (Screw terminal models)
B7A-T6D2 (Modular models)
B7A-R6jj1 (Screw terminal models)
B7A-R6A52 (Modular models)
Note If the B7A Interface Unit is mounted to a Rack with a C200HW-PD024 24-VDC Power Supply Unit, supply
24 VDC from an independent power supply to the B7A Interface Unit or use a transformer to separate the
power supply line to the B7A Interface Unit from the power supply lines to the CPU Unit and I/O Power Supply Unit.
I/O indicator
ERR indicator
Connection terminals
Connection terminals for the B7A Link Terminal:
Connect this terminal to the SIG terminal of the
B7A Link Terminal.
Connect this terminal to the negative power terminal of the B7A Link Terminal.
Supply 12 to 24 VDC.
12 to 24 VDC
200
Appendix B
Specifications
I/O Indicator
Indicates the ON or OFF status of input from the B7A Link Terminal or the ON and OFF status of output to the B7A
Link Terminal.
ERR Indicator
Incorporated by the B7AI1 and lit when the B7AI1’s data transmission or reception is abnormal.
Connection Terminals
SIG:
Connects to the SIG terminal of the B7A Link Terminal.
V–:
Connects to the negative power terminal of the B7A Link Terminal.
! Caution
If the terminals are not connected correctly, the internal circuitry of the B7A Link Terminal will be
damaged.
Note 1. The transmission cable must be a VCTF cable with a thickness of 0.75 mm2 minimum.
2. Do not wire power lines or high-tension lines along with the transmission cable in the same conduit.
Input Mode Selector
The B7AI1 incorporates an input mode selector on the back panel of the Unit, with which the following modes can
be set.
Input mode
15 points + 1 error
16 points
Function
Fifteen-point input from the B7A Link
Terminal is effective. Bit 15 is used as
transmission error bit.
Sixteen-point input from the B7A Link
Terminal is effective.
Switch setting
Bit no.
ll
i
allocation
Upper side
Lower side
00 to 14
15
Status of input indicator lamp 15
Status of the ERR indicator
Input 00 to input 14
Transmission error bit
Not used
Input 00 to input 14
Input 15
Lit when input 15 is ON. Not lit when
input 15 is OFF.
Lit when there is a transmission error and OFF during normal transmission
The ERR indicator is lit when an error occurs. If the error is corrected, the ERR indicator is OFF at the next transmission cycle.
When there is a transmission error, the B7A Link Terminal will hold the data just before the occurrence of the transmission error. If there is a transmission error because the B7A Link Terminal is turned off, however, data 0 is transmitted in the first transmission cycle when the B7A Link Terminal is turned on again.
Transmission errors between the C200H-B7AO1 and B7A Link Terminal are detected by the B7A Link Terminal
only. Check the ERR indicator and error bit for any error.
Performance Specifications
Item
I/O points
C200H-B7AI1
C200H-B7AO1
Transmission distance
16 points or 15 points and 1 error
16 output points
input
500 m max. if power is supplied to the Interface Unit and B7A Link Terminal
separately.
100 m max. if power is supplied to the Interface Unit and B7A Link Terminal
from a single power supply. (24 VDC±10%)
Transmission delay
Typ. 19.2 ms, 31 ms max.
Minimum input time (see note 1)
---
Internal current consumption
5 VDC, 100 mA max.
External power supply (see note 2)
12 to 24 VDC ±10%, 10 mA min.
Weight
200 g max.
16 ms
12 to 24 VDC ±10%, 30 mA min.
Note 1. The minimum input time refers to the minimum time required for reading the input signals from the CPU
Unit. The ON/OFF width of the signal transmitted from the CPU Unit to the Output Relay of the B7A Interface Unit should be set to a value larger than the minimum input time.
2. The value of the external power supply does not include the value required by the B7A Link Terminal.
201
Appendix B
Specifications
Group-2 B7A Interface Units (C200H-B7Ajj)
A Group-2 B7A Interface Unit used with two or four B7A Link Terminals allows the transmission and reception of
32-point or 64-point I/O data over two-conductor cables.
Group-2 B7A Interface Unit
CPU
Unit
Input B7A Link Terminal
Sensor
Switch
Transmission
distance: 500 m
max.
Output B7A Link Terminal
Lamps and other loads
Group-2 B7A Interface Units can be mounted to a CPU Rack or an Expansion I/O Rack. They cannot be mounted
to Slave Racks.
The words allocated to Group-2 B7A Interface Units are determined by I/O number set on the Units. Units with 32
I/O points are allocated two words; Units with 64 I/O points are allocated four words.
Refer to the B7A Link Terminals Datasheet for more information on B7A Link Terminals.
Models
The following Group-2 B7A Interface Units are available.
B7A Interface Unit
Inputs
Outputs
C200H-B7A12
32 points
None
C200H-B7A02
None
32 points
C200H-B7A21
16 points
16 points
C200H-B7A22
32 points
32points
202
Appendix B
Specifications
Connectable B7A Link Terminals
Only 16-point B7A Link Terminals can be connected to a B7A Interface Unit. These are listed in the following
tables.
Input Terminals
Type
Screw terminals
Modular
PC connectors
Model
B7A-T6j1
B7AS-T6j1
B7A-T6j6
B7AS-T6j6
B7A-T6D2
B7A-T6D7
B7A-TjE3
B7A-TjE8
Transmission delay
Standard ((19.2 ms))
High-speed
g p
((3 ms))
Standard (19.2 ms)
High-speed (3 ms)
Standard (19.2 ms)
High-speed (3 ms)
Output Terminals
Type
Screw terminals
Modular
PC connectors
Model
B7A-R6jj1
B7AS-R6jj1
B7A-R6jj6
B7AS-R6jj6
B7A-R6A52
B7A-R6A57
B7A-RjAj3
B7A-RjAj8
Transmission delay
Standard ((19.2 ms))
High-speed
g p
((3 ms))
Standard (19.2 ms)
High-speed (3 ms)
Standard (19.2 ms)
High-speed (3 ms)
Note 1. Do not connect Terminals with different transmission delays to the same Interface Unit. Doing so will
cause a transmission error.
2. B7A Link Terminals with 10-points and B7A Link Terminals with mixed I/O (8 inputs/8 outputs) cannot be
connected to B7A Interface Units. Use 16-point B7A Link Terminals. 16-point B7A Link Terminals
include 16-point (input or output) models, models with 2 circuits configured with 16 points, and models
with 16 points of mixed I/O.
Comparison between Standard and Group-2 B7A Interface Units
Type
yp
Standard
Models
C200H-B7AI1
C200H-B7AO2
Group-2
C200H-B7A12
C200H-B7A02
C200H-B7A21
C200H-B7A22
Word allocations
Same as I/O Units (in order
mounted)
mounted).
Words 030 to 049 allocated
according to I/O number setting
Group 2 High-density
High density I/O
(same as Group-2
Units; see note below)
Connectable B7A Link Terminals
Transmission Transmission
Points
delay
errors
Standard
Input status
16-point
types only
held
Terminals only
automatically
((10-point,
p
(19.2 ms)
32 i t and
32-point,
d
Standard
Switch setting
mixed I/O
(19 2 ms) and to hold or
(19.2
Terminals cannot
high
speed
reset Input
high-speed
be connected.
connected
(3 ms) types
status.
(set via
switch)
Note In the case of Group-2 B7A Interface Units, words 030 to 049 (Group-2 High-density I/O Unit and B7A Interface Unit Area) are allocated according to the setting of the I/O number setting switch on the front of the Unit
as shown in the following table. For mixed I/O Units, words are allocated in in the order output → input.
203
Appendix B
Specifications
Type
Models
32 input points
32 output points
16 output points/16 input
points
32 output points/32 input
points
C200H-B7A12
C200H-B7A02
C200H-B7A21
C200H-B7A22
Words
allocated per
Unit
2
4
Allocation order
2 words for inputs
2 words for outputs
1 word for outputs →
1 word for inputs
2 words for outputs →
2 words for inputs
Example: For I/O
number 0
030: input
030: output
030: output
031: input
030: output
031: output
032: input
033: input
Note B7A Link Terminals with 10-points and B7A Link Terminals with mixed I/O (8 inputs/8 outputs) cannot be
connected to B7A Interface Units. Use 16-point B7A Link Terminals. 16-point B7A Link Terminals include
16-point models (input and output), models with 2 circuits configured with 16 points, and models with 16
points of mixed I/O.
Parts and Names (C200H-B7A22 shown below)
Front
I/O number switch
This switch determines the words allocated to the
Unit.
Status indicators
The indicators depend on the model of B7A Interface Unit.
Connection terminals
Connect to the SIG terminal of the B7A Link Terminal
and to the negative power terminal of the B7A Link
Terminal. The actual use of these terminals depends
on the B7A Interface Unit.
External Power Supply Terminals
Supply 12 to 24 VDC.
12 toto2424
VDC
12
VDC
204
Appendix B
Specifications
Back
DIP switch
Used to set the transmission delay,
transmission error processing mode, input mode, and ERROR indicator operation.
Indicator Operation
The indicators depend on the model of B7A Interface Unit, as shown below.
Name
Color
Function
ERROR 1
ERROR 2
ERROR
Input
transmission
error
Red
Lights when an error occurs in transmissions from an Input B7A Link Terminal.
For the B7A12/22, ERROR 1 is for the first word allocated to the B7A Interface
Unit; ERROR 2 is for the second word.
3ms
Transmission
delay setting
Orange
Lit when the transmission delay is set to the high-speed setting (3 ms).
LOAD OFF
Transmission
error process
Orange
15IN+ERR
Input mode
setting
Orange
Not lit when the transmission delay is set to the standard setting (19.2 ms).
Lit when the processing for transmission errors is set to reset input status.
Not lit when the processing for transmission errors is set to hold input status.
Lit when the input mode mode is set to use 15 inputs and 1 error input.
Not lit when the input mode mode is set to use 16 inputs.
I/O Number Setting
The setting of the I/O number determines the words allocated to the Interface Unit. Set the I/O number to between
0 and 9.
Setting in direction
of notch
Note 1. Turn off the power supply to the PC before changing the I/O number setting. Any new setting will not be
effective until the next time the power supply is turned on.
2. Use a flat-blade screw driver to change the I/O number setting. Be careful not to leave the switch halfway
between settings and be careful not to damage the switch.
205
Appendix B
Specifications
The following table shows the words allocated according to the I/O number. The 32-point Units are the
C200H-B7A12, C200H-B7A02, and C200H-B7A21. The 64-point Unit is the C200H-B7A22.
Words
I/O No.
0
32-point Units
IR 030 and IR 031
64-point Unit
IR 030 to IR 033
1
IR 032 and IR 033
IR 032 to IR 035
2
IR 034 and IR 035
IR 034 to IR 037
3
IR 036 and IR 037
IR 036 to IR 039
4
IR 038 and IR 039
IR 038 to IR 041
5
IR 040 and IR 041
IR 040 to IR 043
6
IR 042 and IR 043
IR 042 to IR 045
7
IR 044 and IR 045
IR 044 to IR 047
8
IR 046 and IR 047
IR 046 to IR 049
9
IR 048 and IR 049
Do not use.
Note 1. Be sure that the same words are not allocated to more than one Unit. For example, if you set a 64-point
Unit to I/O number 0, you cannot use I/O number 1 for any Unit.
2. The above words are also allocated to Group-2 High-density I/O Units. Be sure that the same words are
not allocated to more than one Unit.
DIP Switch Settings
Set the DIP switch as described before for the various models of B7A Interface Units.
C200H-B7A22/12
Pin
Factory setting
(pins 4 and 5 ON)
Function
OFF
ON
1
Transmission delay
Standard (19.2 ms)
High-speed (3 ms)
2
Transmission error process
Hold status
Reset Inputs
3
Input mode
16 inputs
15 inputs + error input
4
ERROR 1 indicator enable
Disabled
Enabled
5
ERROR 2 indicator enable
Disabled
Enabled
6
Not used.
NA
NA
C200H-B7A21
Pin
Factory setting
(pin 5 ON)
Function
OFF
ON
1
Transmission delay
Standard (19.2 ms)
High-speed (3 ms)
2
Transmission error process
Hold status
Reset Inputs
3
Input mode
16 inputs
15 inputs + error input
4
ERROR indicator enable
Disabled
Enabled
5
Not used.
NA
NA
6
Not used.
NA
NA
C200H-B7A02
Pin
Factory setting
(all pins OFF)
Function
OFF
ON
1
Transmission delay
Standard (19.2 ms)
High-speed (3 ms)
2
Not used.
NA
NA
3
Not used.
NA
NA
4
Not used.
NA
NA
5
Not used.
NA
NA
6
Not used.
NA
NA
Transmission Delay
Pin 1 is used to set the transmission delay. The same delay is used for all words allocated to the Unit.
206
Specifications
Appendix B
Set the transmission delay to match that of the B7A Link Terminal. A transmission error will occur if the same transmission delay is not set.
The “3ms” indicator will be lit whenever the high-speed (3 ms) transmission delay is set.
Transmission Error Process
Pin 2 is used to turned ON to specify resetting input status when transmission errors occur. If pin 2 is turned OFF,
input status will be held when transmission errors occur.
The LOAD OFF indicator will be lit whenever pin 2 is turned ON.
Input Mode
Pin 3 is turned ON to specify use of only 15 inputs and the use of bit 15 as a Transmission Error Flag. If pin 3 is OFF,
16 normal inputs can be used.
The “15IN+ERR” indicator will be lit whenever pin 3 is turned ON.
ERROR Indicators
Pin 4 or pins 4 and 5 are turned ON to enable the ERROR, ERROR 1, and/or ERROR 2 indicators. These indicators will not light even if a transmission error occurs if the corresponding pin is turned OFF.
Transmission Error Precautions
Startup
The Transmission Error Flag for the B7A Interface Unit will be OFF when power is turned on to the
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE. If normal transmissions with the B7A Link Terminal are not possible within about 10
ms, the Transmission Error Flag (bit 15) will turn ON (i.e., if its operation is enabled by the input mode setting).
All input bits will remain OFF until normal transmissions are achieved.
Inputs
When a transmission error occurs, input status will be either held or all inputs will be reset according to the setting
for the transmission error process, and the Transmission Error Flag (bit 15) will turn ON (i.e., if its operation is
enabled by the input mode setting). The Transmission Error Flag will go OFF and the input status will return to
normal when normal transmissions are achieved again.
Outputs
Transmission errors for Output B7A Link Terminals are not detected at the B7A Interface Unit and must be confirmed using the error indicators or error outputs on the Link Terminal.
207
Appendix B
Specifications
Wiring
Terminal Names and Allocations
The use of the terminals depends on the model of the B7A Interface Unit. “m” indicates the first word allocated to
the Unit according to the I/O number setting and can be calculated as follows:
m = 030 + (2 x I/O number)
C200H-B7A22
Terminal
Name
Function
B0
B1
SIG OUT1
– OUT1
B2
B3
SIG OUT2
– OUT2
B4
B5
SIG IN1
– IN1
B6
B7
SIG IN2
– IN2
B8
A0 to A7
B9
A8
NC
Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link
Terminal.
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link
Terminal.
Not used.
+V
–V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – terminal on external power supply.
Word
m
m+1
m+2
m+3
NA
C200H-B7A21
Terminal
Name
Function
B0
B1
SIG OUT1
– OUT1
Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
Not used.
B2, B3
NC
B4
B5
SIG IN1
– IN1
B6 to B8
A0 to A7
B9
A8
NC
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link
Terminal.
Not used.
+V
–V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – terminal on external power supply.
Word
m
NA
m+1
NA
C200H-B7A12
Terminal
208
Name
Function
B0
B1
SIG IN1
– IN1
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link
Terminal.
Not used.
B2, B3
NC
B4
B5
SIG IN2
– IN2
B6 to B8
A0 to A7
B9
A8
NC
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link
Terminal.
Not used.
+V
–V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – terminal on external power supply.
Word
m
NA
m+1
NA
Appendix B
Specifications
C200H-B7A02
Terminal
Name
Function
B0
B1
SIG OUT1
– OUT1
Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
Not used.
B2, B3
NC
B4
B5
SIG OUT2
– OUT2
B6 to B8
A0 to A7
B9
A8
NC
Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
Not used.
+V
–V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – terminal on external power supply.
Word
m
NA
m+1
NA
Recommended Cables and Transmission Distance
The following cables are recommended to connect the B7A Interface Unit to B7A Link Terminals. The wiring method and transmission distance depend on the transmission delay and on whether or not a common power supply is
being used for the B7A Link Terminal and the Interface Unit.
Standard Transmission Delays (19.2 ms): Cap-tire Cable
Power supply
Cable
mm2
Transmission distance
Common
VCTF, 0.75
x 3 conductors
100 m max.
Separate
VCTF ,0.75 mm2 x 2 conductors
500 m max.
High-speed Transmission Delays (3 ms): Shielded Cable
Power supply
Cable
Transmission distance
Common
Shielded cable, 0.75 mm2 x 3 conductors
50 m max.
Separate
Shielded cable, 0.75 mm2 x 2 conductors
100 m max.
Terminal Construction
Use hook-type crimp connectors with a line thickness of 0.25 to 1.65 mm2. The
construction of the terminals is shown in the illustration.
Wiring Method
Standard Transmission Delays (19.2 ms)
Common Power Supply
B7A Link Terminal
B7A Interface Unit
Transmission distance: 100 m max.
B7A Link Terminal
Transmission cable: VCTF 0.75 mm2 or higher
12 to 24 VDC
209
Appendix B
Specifications
Separate Power Supplies
B7A Link Terminal
B7A Interface Unit
12 to 24 VDC
Transmission distance: 500 m max.
B7A Link Terminal
12 to 24 VDC
Transmission cable: VCTF 0.75 mm2 or higher
12 to 24 VDC
High-speed Transmission Delays (3 ms): Shielded Cable
B7A Link Terminal
Common Power Supply
B7A Interface Unit
Transmission distance: 50 m max.
B7A Link Terminal
Shielded cable: 0.75
mm2
or higher
GND
Shielded cable: 0.75 mm2 or higher
24 VDC±10%
GND
Separate Power Supplies
B7A Link Terminal
B7A Interface Unit
12 to 24 VDC
Transmission distance: 100 m max.
Shielded cable: 0.75 mm2 or higher
B7A Link Terminal
GND
12 to 24 VDC
12 to 24 VDC
Shielded cable: 0.75 mm2 or higher
GND
Note 1. We recommend grounding the shielded cable.
2. If shielded cable is not used, the maximum transmission distance is 10 m regardless of whether a common or separate power supplies are used. (Use 0.75 mm2 or higher VCTF cable.)
3. To prevent noise on the transmission cable, do not lay it near power cables or high-voltage lines.
210
Appendix B
Specifications
Specifications
Item
C200H-B7A12
C200H-B7A02
I/O points
32 input points or
30 input points and 2
error inputs
32 output points
Transmission
method
Transmission
distance (see
note 1)
One-way distributed multiplex transmission
Standard:
500 m max.
High-speed:
100 m max.
Transmission
delay
Standard:
Typ. 19.2 ms, 31 ms max.
High-speed:
Typ. 3 ms, 5 ms max.
Minimum input
time (see note
2, 3)
Standard:
16 ms
High-speed:
2.4 ms
Internal current
consumption
External power
supply (see
note 4)
5 VDC, 100 mA max.
Weight
300 g max.
Dimensions
35 x 130 x 128 mm (W x H x D)
C200H-B7A21
C200H-B7A22
16 output points and
16 input points or
15 input points + 1
error input
32 output points and
32 input points or
30 input points + 2
error inputs
0.05 A min.
0.08 A min.
12 to 24 VDC ±10%
0.05 A min.
0.06 A min.
Note 1. The transmission distance also depends on whether a common or separate power supplies are used.
2. The minimum input time refers to the minimum time required for reading the input signals from the CPU
Unit.
3. The ON/OFF width of the signal transmitted from the CPU Unit to the Output Relay of the B7A Interface
Unit should be set to a value larger than the minimum input time.
4. The capacity of the external power supply does not include the capacity required by the B7A Link Terminal.
Dimensions
130
x
x
x
x
x
x
Backplane
x
x
128
35
145
211
Appendix C
Unit Current and Power Consumption
Maximum Current and Power Supplied
There are limits to the current and power that can be supplied to each Rack and Unit. When designing the system,
take the current consumption into account.
Follow the charts below and be careful that the total current consumption does not exceed the maximum current
and maximum total power supplied.
Current Supplied
Model number
Max. current supplied
5V
26 V
Maximum
power
supplied
C200HW-PA204
4.6 A
0.6 A
24 V
(No-voltage
contact
current)
---
C200HW-PA204S
4.6 A
0.6 A
0.8 A
30 W
C200HW-PA204R
4.6 A
0.6 A
---
30 W
C200HW-PA209R
9.0 A
1.3 A
---
45 W
C200HW-PD024
4.6 A
0.6 A
---
30 W
30 W
Note The sum total of the 5-V, 26-V, and 24-V power consumptions must be equal to or less than 30 W for the
PA204j, or equal to or less than 45 W for the PA209.
Design the system so that the following conditions are satisfied.
Condition 1
(1) (Total current consumption of all Units in the 5-V system) ≤ (the figure in the
5-V column)
(2) (Total current consumption of all Units in the 26-V system) ≤ (the figure in the
26-V column)
(3) (Total current consumption of all Units in the 24-V system) ≤ (the figure in the
24-V column)
Condition 2
(1) x 5 V + (2) x 26 V + (3) x 24 V ≤ (maximum power supplied)
Calculating Current and Power Consumption
The method of calculating current and power consumption is demonstrated here using the following Unit combinations as examples.
Example 1: For C200HW-PA204S
OC221 Contact Output Units: 4 Units
ID211 No-voltage Input Units: 3 Units
LK202 Host Link Unit:
1 Unit
External power supply used:
0.3 A
Power Supply
5-V system
26-V system
24-V system
Current Consumption
0.01 x 7 + 0.25 = 0.32 A (≤ 4.6 A)
0.075 x 4 = 0.30 A (≤ 0.6 A)
0.06 x 3 + 0.3 = 0.48 A (≤ 0.8 A)
Power Consumption
0.32 A x 5 V = 1.6 W
0.30 A x 26 V = 7.8 W
0.48 A x 24 V = 11.52 W
Total = 20.92 W (≤ 30 W)
213
Appendix C
Unit Current and Power Consumption
Example 2: For C200HW-PA204S
ID212 DC Input Units:
6 Units
CT002 High-speed Counter Units:
2 Units
External power supply used (for ID212): 0.8 A
Current Consumption
Power Supply
5-V system
0.01 x 6 + 0.3 x 2 = 0.66 A (≤ 4.6 A)
26-V system
0
24-V system
Ext. power supply = 0.8 A (≤ 0.8 A)
Total = 22.5 W (≤ 30W)
Example 3: For C200HW-PA204S
OC221 Contact Output Units:
4 Units
ID217 High-density Input Unit:
1 Unit
OD219 High-density Output Unit:
1 Unit
CT002 High-speed Counter Unit:
1 Unit
External power supply used (for ID217): 0.3 A
Current Consumption
Power Supply
5-V system
0.01 x 4 + 0.12 + 0.27 +0.3
= 0.73 A (≤ 4.6 A)
26-V system
0.075 x 4 = 0.30 A (≤ 0.6 A)
24-V system
Ext. power supply = 0.8 A (≤ 0.8 A)
Total = 18.65 W (≤ 30 W)
Power Consumption
0.66 A x 5 V = 3.3 W
0
0.8 A x 24 V = 19.2 W
Power Consumption
0.73 A x 5 V = 3.65 W
0.3 A x 26 V = 7.8 W
0.8 A x 24 V = 19.2 W
Calculating Power Consumption for Racks
The total power consumption (primary power input) for an individual Rack can be
broadly calculated as shown in the following examples.
Example 1: CPU Rack
Total power consumption of Units + 3.5
0.6 x 0.55 (VA)
3.5 = CPU Unit power consumption
0.6 = 60% efficiency
0.55= Power rate
Example 2: All Other Racks
Total power consumption of Units + 2
0.6 x 0.55 (1) (VA)
2 = I/O Power Supply Unit (Remote I/O Slave Unit) power consumption
0.6 = 60% efficiency
0.55 (1) = Power rate
(Number in parentheses: when RT002-P or RT202 is used.)
Current Drawn by CPU
Units and Backplanes
Current Drawn by
Communications Boards
214
Unit
CPU Unit
Model
5-V supply
CPU Backplane
C200HE-CPUjj-E 0.5 A
C200HG-CPUjj-E
C200HX-CPUjj-E
0.1 A
C200HW-BCjjj
I/O Backplane
C200HW-BIjjj
Unit
Communications
B d
Board
Model
C200HW-COM01
C200HW-COM02
C200HW-COM03
C200HW-COM04-E
C200HW-COM05-E
C200HW-COM06-E
0.15 A
26-V supply
---
-----
5-V supply
0.03 A
0.1 A
0.2 A
0.1 A
0.1 A
0.2 A
26-V supply
-------------
Appendix C
Unit Current and Power Consumption
Current Drawn by Standard
I/O Units
Unit
DC Input
AC Input
AC/DC Input
Contact Output
Transistor Output
Model number
5-V supply
26-V supply
---
C200H-ID211
C200H-ID212
C200H-IA121
C200H-IA122/IA122V
C200H-IA221
C200H-IA222/IA222V
C200H-IM211
C200H-IM212
0.01 A each
C200H-OC221
C200H-OC222
C200H-OC223
C200H-OC224
C200H-OC225
C200H-OC222N
0.01 A each
C200H-OC224N
0.01 A
C200H-OC226N
0.03 A
0.09 A per 8
points when
points are simultaneously
ON
C200H-OD411
0.14 A
---
C200H-OD211
0.16 A
C200H-OD212
0.18 A
C200H-OD213
0.14 A
0.05 A
0.008 A
0.075 A per
p
8 points
i
when points
are simultaneously
y ON
C200H-OD214
0.01 A each
0.075 A per
8 points
when points
are simultaneously ON
C200H-OA21A
0.16 A
---
C200H-OA222V
0.20A
C200H-OA223
0.18 A
C200H-OA224
C200H-TM001
C200H-B7AI1
C200H-B7AO1
C200HS-INT01
0.27 A
0.06 A
0.10 A
C200H-OD216
C200H-OD217
Triac Output
Analog Timer
Standard B7A
I
f
Interface
Interrupt Input
Current Drawn by Group-2
High-density I/O Units
Unit
DC Input
Transistor Output
Current Drawn by Group-2
B7A Interface Units
Unit
B7A Interface Unit
(G
(Group-2
2U
Units)
i )
Model number
C200H-ID111
C200H-ID216
C200H-ID217
C200H-ID218
C200H-ID219
C200H-OD218
C200H-OD219
C200H-OD21B
Model number
C200H-B7A12/02
C200H-B7A21/22
0.02 A
5-V supply
0.12 A
0.1 A
0.12 A
0.1 A
0.12 A
0.18 A
0.27 A
0.18 A
5-V supply
0.10 A
26-V supply
---
26-V supply
---
215
Appendix C
Unit Current and Power Consumption
Current Drawn by Other
Units
Unit
Model number
26-V supply
0.25 A
0.15 A
0.25 A
0.35 A
---
PC Link
C200H-LK101-PV1
C200H-LK201-V1
C200H-LK202-V1
C200H-LK401
DeviceNet Master
C200HW-DRM21
0.25 A
---
CompoBus/S
Master
C200HW-SRM21
0.15 A
---
0.20 A
0.25 A
0.80 A
---
Host Link
Remote Master
C200H-RM001-PV1
C200H-RM201
SYSMAC LINK
C200HW-SLK13/SLK14/
SLK23/SLK24
SYSMAC NET Link C200HS-SNT32
Power Supply
C200H-APS01/APS02/
Adapter
APS03
Current Drawn by Special
I/O Units
5-V supply
Unit
Model number
TTL Input
C200H-ID501
DC Input
TTL Output
Transistor Output
TTL I/O
DC Input/Transistor
p
O
Output
C200H-ID215
C200H-OD501
C200H-OD215
C200H-MD501
C200H-MD115
C200H-MD215
C200H-CT001-V1
C200H-CT002
C200H-CT021
C200H-NC111
C200H-NC112
C200H-NC211
C200H-NC113
High-speed
g p
C
Counter
Position Control
1.00 A
0A
5-V supply
0.13 A
26-V supply
---
0.22 A
0.18 A
0.30 A
0.45 A
0.15 A
0.50 A
0.30 A
C200H-NC213
C200H-NC413
Analog Input
C200H-AD001
C200H-AD002
Analog Output
C200H-DA001
C200H-DA002
C200H-PID03
Motion Control Unit C200H-MC221
Temperature
p
S
Sensor
Input
I
ASCII
Voice Output
C200H-TS001/TS002
C200H-TS101/TS102
C200H-ASC02
C200H-OV001
ID Sensor
C200H-IDS01-V1
C200H-IDS21
216
0.50 A
0.55 A
0.45 A
0.65 A
0.60 A
0.65 A
(0.85 A when a
Teaching Box is
connected)
0.45 A
0.20 A
0.30 A
0.25 A
0.12 A
Appendix C
Unit Current and Power Consumption
Unit
Fuzzy Logic
Temperature
p
C
Control
l
Cam Positioner
Controller Link Unit
PC Card Unit
Maximum Current and
Power Supplied
Model number
26-V supply
---
C200H-FZ001
C200H-TC001
C200H-TC002
C200H-TC003
C200H-TC101
C200H-TC102
C200H-TC103
C200H-CP114
C200HW-CLK21
0.30 A
0.33 A
0.30 A
0.30 A
---
C200HW-PCU01
C200HW-PCS01
1.7 A
---
Model number
Max. current supplied
5V
C200H-RT001-P
5-V supply
2.7 A
26 V
0.6 A
24 V
Maximum
power
supplied
0.8 A
28 W
C200H-RT002-P
---
23 W
C200H-RT201
0.8 A
28 W
C200H-RT202
---
23 W
Note The sum total of the 5-V, 26-V, and 24-V power consumptions must be equal to or less than the value for the
maximum power supplied given in the above table (28 W or 23 W).
217
Appendix D
Dimensions and Mounting Methods
Racks
The dimensions shown below are for both the CPU Rack and Expansion I/O Racks. The C dimension for the Programming Console will increase by 30 mm when the Programming Console Adapter C200H-BP001 is used, and
will increase by 50 mm when the Programming Console Adapter C200H-BP002 is used.
CPU Units
Memory Cassettes
73.2
44
9.1
Communications Boards
C200HW-COM02/03/05-E/06-E
C200HW-COM01/04-E
219
Appendix D
Dimensions and Mounting Methods
Backplanes
130
W
17
Backplane
CPU Backplane
p
I/O Backplane
p
Model
Width (W)
C200HW-BC031
C200HW-BC051
C200HW-BC081-V1
C200HW-BC101-V1
C200HW-BI031
C200HW-BI051
C200HW-BI081-V1
C200HW-BI101-V1
260 mm
330 mm
435 mm
505 mm
189 mm
259 mm
364 mm
434 mm
I/O Connecting Cables
The dimensions shown below are for I/O Connecting Cables.
L
74 64
49
Cable
220
Length (L)
C200H-CN311
30 cm
C200H-CN711
70 cm
C200H-CN221
2m
C200H-CN521
5m
C200H-CN131
10 m
15
Dimensions and Mounting Methods
Appendix D
Power Supply Units
C200HW-PA204
C200HW-PA204S
C200HW-PA204R
C200HW-PD024
C200HW-PA209R
221
Appendix D
Dimensions and Mounting Methods
C200H-PRO27 Programming Console
The dimensions shown below are for the Programming Console.
192
96
(30)
48
C200H-CN222/CN422 Connecting Cable
33
29
2000 (4000)
12
Standard I/O Units
The dimensions shown below are for the two shapes of Standard I/O Units mentioned throughout these specifications.
10-terminal Terminal Block (A-shape I/O Units)
x
x
Backplane
130
x
x
101
35
222
118
Appendix D
Dimensions and Mounting Methods
10-terminal Terminal Block (E-shape I/O Units)
Backplane
x
x
130
x
x
121
35
138
C200H-OA223
19-terminal Terminal Block (B-shape I/O Units)
x
x
x
x
130
Backplane
x
x
x
x
128
35
145
19-terminal Terminal Block (Extended B-shape I/O Units)
x
x
x
x
Backplane
130
x
x
x
x
152
35
169
223
Appendix D
Dimensions and Mounting Methods
Terminal Dimensions
M3.5
7.3
8.5
Backplane
Interrupt Input Unit
The dimensions shown below are for the Interrupt Input Unit classified as Special I/O Units.
x
x
130
x
x
35
101
118
Backplane
Standard B7A Interface Unit
The dimensions shown below are for the B7A Interface Unit classified as Special I/O Units.
130
35
101
118
The dimensions shown below are for the Group-2 B7A Interface Units.
Backplane
Group-2 B7A Interface Units
224
Appendix D
Dimensions and Mounting Methods
Analog Timer Unit
The dimensions shown below are for the Analog Timer Unit classified as Special I/O Units.
Backplane
130
101
35
118
Group-2 High-density I/O Units
The dimensions shown below are for the Group-2 High-density I/O Units.
Backplane
Backplane
C and D Types
130
35
118
101
Approx. 143
Backplane
High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)
The dimensions shown below are for the High-density I/O Units classified as Special I/O Units.
130
35
101
225
Appendix D
Dimensions and Mounting Methods
Dimensions with Unit Mounted
Fujitsu Connector
G79-jC Connecting Cable
Backplane
G79-jC
Connecting
Cable
Backplane
Connecting
cable
118
118
145
Approx. 163
Mounting Dimensions
7
A±0.2
Four, M4
Backplane
130
68 to 108
118±0.2
80 to 120
130
Backplane
118±0.2
6
Four, M4
W
Backplane
CPU Backplane
p
I/O Backplane
p
226
Model
C200HW-BC031
C200HW-BC051
C200HW-BC081-V1
C200HW-BC101-V1
C200HW-BI031
C200HW-BI051
C200HW-BI081-V1
C200HW-BI101-V1
A±0.2
246 mm
316 mm
421 mm
491 mm
175 mm
245 mm
350 mm
420 mm
W
260 mm
330 mm
435 mm
505 mm
189 mm
259 mm
364 mm
434 mm
Appendix D
Dimensions and Mounting Methods
Panel Mounting of C200H-PRO27 Programming Console
Bracket
Two screws
Panel thickness (t = 1.0 to 3.2)
The following is the standard panel cut dimensions for the Programming Console (conforming to DIN 43700).
186 +1.1
0
92 +0.8
0
Use the C200H-ATT01 Mounting Bracket (sold separately) to mount the C200H-PRO27 Programming Console to
panels.
75.5
116
9.1
14.1
227
Appendix D
Dimensions and Mounting Methods
Take the space required for the cable into consideration when mounting the Programming Console to panels.
37
15
Approximately 80 mm is
required.
Use either one of the
connectors.
Approximately 70 mm is
required.
228
Glossary
ASCII code
[A(merican) S(tandard) C(ode for) I(nformation) I(nterchange)] A standard computer code used to facilitate the interchange of information among various types
of data-processing equipment.
ASCII Unit
An Intelligent I/O Unit. The ASCII Unit has its own CPU and 16 kilobytes of
memory. This Unit enables communication between the PC and any other device which uses ASCII code. The ASCII Unit can be programmed in BASIC.
Backplane
A base to which Units are mounted to form a Rack. Backplanes provide a series
of connectors for these Units along with wiring to connect them to the CPU Unit
and Power Supply. Backplanes also provide connectors used to connect them to
other Backplanes. In some Systems, different Backplanes are used for different
Racks; in other Systems, Racks differ only by the Units mounted to them.
back-up
A copy of existing data which is valuable if data is accidentally erased.
baud rate
Transfer speed between two devices in a system measured in bits per second.
For example, an optical sensor might be configured to send its information to the
personal computer at 9600 baud. It is important for both of the devices to be set
to the same baud rate.
bit
The smallest piece of information that can be represented on a computer. A bit
has the value of either zero or one, corresponding to the electrical signals ON
and OFF. A bit is one binary digit.
central processing unit
A device that is capable of storing a program and data, and executing the set of
instructions contained in the program. In a PC System, the central processing
unit executes the program, processes I/O signals, communicates with external
devices, etc.
communication cable
Cable used to transfer data between components of a control system and conforming to the RS-232C or RS-422 standards.
Communications Board
A board that is mounted to the optional slot of a C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit. With
a Communications Board, the CPU Unit can communicate with the SYSMAC
LINK Unit, SYSMAC NET Link Unit, Programmable Terminal, Temperature Controller, personal computer, bar code reader, or any other peripheral device via
RS-232C, RS-422, or RS-485.
Control System
All of the hardware and software components used to control other devices. A
Control System includes the PC System, the PC programs, and all I/O devices
that are used to control or obtain feedback from the controlled system.
counter
A PC function that counts the number of occurrences of a certain event.
CPU
An acronym for central processing unit.
cycle time
The total time it takes the PC to perform internal operations, i.e., reset the watchdog timer, read the program, receive input data, send output data, and execute
instructions. Cycle time is monitored by the watchdog timer within the PC, and if
it takes longer than a certain specified amount of time, an error message may be
generated, or the CPU Unit may just stop. Cycle times will differ depending on
the configuration of the system.
229
Glossary
data area
An area in the PC’s memory that is designed to hold a specific type of data, e.g.,
the LR area is designed to hold common data in a PC Link System.
data link
Allows for the connection of up to 32 PCs in a Net Link System where each is
contributing information to a common memory area. Data links may be established in the LR and/or DM memory areas.
debugging
The process of checking for errors in a program.
default condition
The original condition of a function or system. For example, the Ladder Support
Software’s (LSS) installation utility will place the LSS in the C:\LSS directory, but
this default condition can be changed so that it places the LSS in a different
directory.
distributed control
An automation concept in which control of each portion of an automated system
is located near the devices actually being controlled, i.e., control is decentralized
and “distributed” over the system. Distributed control is a concept basic to PC
Systems.
EEPROM
[E(lectrically) E(rasable) P(rogrammable) R(ead) O(nly) M(emory)] A type of
ROM in which stored data can be erased and reprogrammed. This is accomplished using a special control lead connected to the EEPROM chip and can be
done without having to remove the EEPROM chip from the device in which it is
mounted.
electrical noise
Electric ‘static’ that can disturb electronic communications. The ‘snow’ that can
appear on a TV screen is an example of the effects of electrical noise.
EPROM
[E(rasable) P(rogrammable) R(ead) O(nly) M(emory)] A type of ROM in which
stored data can be erased, by ultraviolet light or other means, and reprogrammed.
Expansion I/O Unit
An I/O Unit for a Package-type PC that provides more I/O points to the PC.
factory computer
A general-purpose computer, usually quite similar to a business computer, that
is used in automated factory control.
flag
A bit that is turned ON and OFF automatically by the system in order to provide
status information.
High-speed Counter
A Special I/O Unit. A High Speed Counter Unit counts independently of the PC’s
cycle time. This allows counting of very short, fast signals.
host computer
A computer that is used to transfer data to or receive data from a PC in a Host
Link system. The host computer is used for data management and overall system control. Host computers are generally small personal or business computers.
IBM PC/AT or compatible
A computer that has similar architecture to, and is logically compatible with an
IBM PC/XT computer; and that can run software designed for that computer.
instruction line
A succession of instructions which begins with a load instruction at the left bus
bar and ends at a right bus bar.
interface
An interface is the conceptual boundary between systems or devices and usually involves changes in the way the communicated data is represented. Interface
devices such as NSBs perform operations such as changing the coding, format,
or speed of data.
230
Glossary
I/O devices
The devices which are connected to the terminals on I/O Units, Special I/O Units,
or Intelligent I/O Units. I/O devices may be part of the Control System if they
function to help control other devices, or they may be part of the controlled system if they interact directly with it.
I/O point
The place at which an input signal enters the PC System or an output signal
leaves the PC System. In physical terms, an I/O point corresponds to terminals
or connector pins on a Unit; in terms of programming, an I/O point corresponds
to an I/O bit in the IR area.
I/O table
Diagram written to the IR memory area listing the type of I/O units controlled by a
PC. It must be cleared before programming or when I/O units are changed.
Tables can be read, verified, or transferred to a EPROM.
I/O Unit
The most basic type of Unit mounted to a Backplane. I/O Units include Input
Units and Output Units, each of which is available in a range of specifications.
I/O Units do not include Special I/O Units, Link Units, etc.
Limit Switch
A switch that detects when an object has reached the limit of its movement by
actually making contact with the object. Limit Switches are fitted to electric elevators, traveling cranes, etc. to indicate when a certain part of the equipment has
traveled to the specified limit.
Link Unit
Any of the Units used to connect a PC to a Link System. These are Remote I/O
Units, I/O Link Units, PC Link Units, Host Link Units, and Net Link Units.
operating mode
The Display Terminal Unit can operate in five different modes: Page Read, Terminal. Dynamic Scan, Read/Write, and Self-Diagnosis.
page
One complete Display Terminal Unit screen. Two hundred screens can be
stored on one RAM card.
parallel interface
The parallel interface uses the RS-232 connector, but is not serial communication. When parallel mode is selected as the communication mode, up to 16 Display Terminal Units can be connected to a PC in parallel.
PC
An acronym for Programmable Controller.
PCB
An acronym for printed circuit board.
PC Link Unit
A Unit used to connect two or more PCs together so that they can exchange data
through their LR areas.
Photoelectric Switch
A switch that uses light to detect the presence of an object.
Power Supply
A Unit that mounts to a Backplane in a Rack PC. It provides power at the voltage
required by the other Units on the Rack.
printed circuit board
A board onto which electrical circuits are printed for mounting into a computer or
electrical device.
Programmable Controller
A small, computer-like device that can control peripheral equipment, such as an
electric door or quality control devices, based on programming and peripheral
input devices. Any process that can be controlled using electrical signals can be
controlled by a PC. PCs can be used independently or networked together into a
system to control more complex operations.
programming device
A peripheral device used to write programs and to input a program to a PC or to
alter or monitor a program already stored in the PC. There are dedicated pro-
231
Glossary
gramming devices, such as Programming Consoles, and there are non-dedicated programming devices, such as a host computer.
PROM
[P(rogrammable) R(ead) O(nly) M(emory)] A type of ROM into which the program or data may be written after manufacture, by a customer, but which is fixed
from that time on.
PROM Writer
A PROM Writer is a device used to write data to ROM, PROM, and EPROM storage chips.
Proximity Switch
A switch that uses magnetic induction to measure the distance of a metallic object from the front of the switch.
Rack PC
A PC that is composed of Units mounted to one or more Racks. This configuration is the most flexible, and most large PCs are Rack PCs. A Rack PC is the
opposite of a Package-type PC, which has all of the basic I/O, storage, and control functions built into a single package.
RAM
[R(andom) A(ccess) M(emory)] RAM will not retain data when power is disconnected. Therefore data should not be stored in RAM.
register/registered
Storing text and graphics in the RAM/ROM card from a personal computer or the
ASCII Unit. Graphics that have been written to the RAM/ROM card are referred
to as registered messages.
Remote I/O Unit
A Unit that extends the distance an Expansion I/O Unit can be from the CPU Unit.
ROM
[R(ead) O(nly) M(emory)] A type of digital storage that cannot be written to. A
ROM chip is manufactured with its program or data already stored in it, and it can
never be changed. However, the program or data can be read as many times as
desired.
switching capacity
The voltage/current that relay can switch ON and OFF.
stepping motor
An output device that rotates according to signals from the Control System. The
rotation is very precise and occurs in pre-defined “steps.”
switch
An input device that sends either an ON or OFF signal to the Control System. A
switch can be operated either by a person or by the movement of a piece of
equipment or material.
system configuration
The arrangement in which Units in a System are connected. This term refers to
the conceptual arrangement and wiring together of all the devices needed to
comprise the System. In OMRON terminology, system configuration is used to
describe the arrangement and connection of the Units comprising a Control System that includes one or more PCs.
Unit
In OMRON PC terminology, the word Unit is capitalized to indicate any product
sold for a PC System. though most of the names of these products end with the
word Unit, not all do, e.g., a Remote Terminal is referred to in a collective sense
as a Unit. Context generally makes any limitations of this word clear.
watchdog timer
A special timer inside the CPU Unit that monitors the PC’s cycle time. The watchdog timer sets a flag if the cycle time becomes longer than a certain specified
value. This is useful if the correct operation of your System depends on a certain
maximum cycle time.
word
In digital circuits, a group of bits. Usually a word consists of four, eight, or sixteen
bits. In C-series PCs, a word consists of sixteen bits. Words can be used to store
data, or they can be used for I/O.
work bits
Bits in the IR area that are not being used for input or output. These bits can be
used in the program in any way desired.
232
Index
A-B
F-G
ambient temperature, 51
factory computer, 2
Analog Timer Unit
dimensions, 225
specifications, 198
grounding
ground terminal, 67
line ground terminal, 67
wire, 67
applications, precautions, xiv
assembly, I/O Units, 58
B7A Interface Unit, dimensions, 224
B7A Interface Units
dimensions, 224
Group-2 Units, 202
B7A Link Terminals, 203
Backplane Insulation Plate, 55
battery, Memory Unit, replacement, 91
Group-2 High-density I/O Units, 27
C-shape, 28
D-shape, 28
dimensions, 225
H-L
High-density I/O Units, 30
dimensions, 225
limitations, 182, 195
specifications, 169
humidity, 50
C
I/O Unit Cover, 70
control components, 2
I/O Units
Group-2 High-density I/O Units, 27
High-density I/O Units, 30
Standard I/O Units, 25
Control System, 2
inductive load surge suppressor, 75
cooling, fan, 50
input devices, 4
CPU Unit
components, 14
Memory Cassettes, 17
installation
environment
ambient conditions, 50
cooling, 50
cooling fan, 51
Rack clearance, 50
precautions, xiv
contact protection circuit, 136
current consumption, 213, 217
5-V supply, 215, 216
CX-Programmer, 32
interlock circuit, 76
cycle, 6
cycle time, 6
D-E
dimensions, 211, 219, 220, 221
duct work
I/O wiring, 76
power cables, 76
EC Directives, xv
electrical noise, 74
electrostatic charge, 50
errors
CPU Rack, 84
Expansion I/O Rack, 84
Input Unit, 85
Output Unit, 86
Interrupt Input Unit, dimensions, 224
leakage current
input, 71
output, 73
limit switch, 4
M
Memory Cassette, 17
installing, 61
models, C200HS, 95
mounting
conditions, 33
Racks, conduit, 51
mounting requirements, 60
DIN track mounting, 55
DIN track mounting bracket, 56
procedure, 56
233
Index
O-P
one-to-one link, wiring, 118
operating environment, precautions, xiii
output devices, 4
PC
block diagram, 5
flowchart, 7
operation, 5
role of, 4
PCs, cooling, 50
photoelectric switch, 4
power consumption, 213, 217
power interruptions, Programmable Controller, 77
precautions
applications, xiv
general, xi, xii
operating environment, xiii
safety, xii
process control computer, 2
Programming Console
checking initial operation, 82
Hand-held, 3
proximity switch, 4
R
relay, printed circuit board, 90
relays, Output Unit, replacement, 88
RS-232C, port specifications, 117
RS-232C port
connecting devices, one-to-one link, 118
specifications, 117
wiring example, 117
S
safety precautions. See precautions
servomotor drivers, 3
servomotors, 3, 5
short-circuit protection, 73
short-circuit protection, 146
solenoid, 5
Special I/O Units, 33
specifications
C200H-ID501, 169
C200H-IA121, 122
C200H-IA122, 123
C200H-IA122V, 123
C200H-IA221, 124
C200H-IA222, 125
C200H-IA222V, 125
C200H-ID211, 120, 153
234
C200H-ID212, 121
C200H-ID215, 171
C200H-ID216, 155
C200H-ID217, 156
C200H-ID218, 158
C200H-ID219, 159
C200H-IM211, 126
C200H-IM212, 127
C200H-MD115 (dynamic), 188
C200H-MD115 (static), 186
C200H-MD215 (dynamic), 192
C200H-MD215 (static), 190
C200H-MD501 (dynamic), 184
C200H-MD501 (static), 182
C200H-OA122-E, 147
C200H-OA221, 149
C200H-OA222V, 150
C200H-OA223, 151
C200H-OA224, 152
C200H-OC221, 128
C200H-OC222, 129
C200H-OC222N, 133
C200H-OC222V, 133
C200H-OC223, 131
C200H-OC224, 132
C200H-OC224N, 135
C200H-OC224V, 135
C200H-OC225, 130
C200H-OC226, 134
C200H-OC226N, 134
C200H-OD211, 139
C200H-OD212, 140
C200H-OD213, 141
C200H-OD214, 142
C200H-OD215 (dynamic), 179
C200H-OD215 (static), 177
C200H-OD216, 144
C200H-OD217, 145
C200H-OD218, 160
C200H-OD219, 164
C200H-OD21A, 146
C200H-OD21B, 168
C200H-OD411, 138
C200H-OD501 (dynamic), 175
C200H-OD501 (static), 173
C200HS-INT01, 196
C200H-TM001, 198
Contact Output Unit, life expectancy, 136
Group-2 B7A Interface Units, 202
High-density I/O Units, 169
Standard I/O Units, 120
Standard I/O Units, 25
A-shape, 26
B-shape, 26
dimensions, 222
E-shape, 26
specifications, 120
static electricity, preventing, 50
stepping motor, 5
surge current, output, 74
SYSMAC LINK, 40
SYSMAC NET Link, 41
system configuration, 3
Index
T-W
terminal block, 69
transistor output, residual voltage, 73
wiring
AC Input Units, 71
DC Input Units, 70
power supply, 63
235
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. W302-E1-09
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code
1
Date
June 1996
2
March 1997
Revised content
Original production
Relay Output Units changed to Contact Output Units
throughout the manual.
Page 11: 64-point Units column added to the second
table in CPU Units.
Pages 20, 22, 82, 98, 111, 177: C200H-OC222V,
C200H-OC224V, and C200H-OC226 Contact Output
Units added.
Page 21: Note on C200H-OC226 dimensions added.
Page 23: The settings corrected for I/O Number Setting Switch at the bottom of page.
Page 42: Ambient Conditions precautions replaced.
Page 43: Note on tightening torque added.
Page 50: Note 3 corrected.
Pages 54, 56: Crimp terminals information corrected.
3
August 1997
Added the ZE-version C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit to
Section 2, Appendix A, and Appendix B.
Pages 17, 18, 54, 58: AC input terminal information
4
October 1997
5
June 2000
6
January 2001
07
November 2001
Pages 55, 56: Crimp terminals information corrected.
EC Directives information added.
Page 57: Tightening torque information added.
Page 59: Contact output circuit corrected.
Pages 76 to 78: Output Unit Relay and Output Units
added to the procedure.
Page 85: Relay added to Optional Products.
Page 93: Output capacity corrected in the table.
Page 96: Connector models corrected.
Page 112: New Contact Output Units reflected.
Pages 116, 117, 122: Circuit configurations corrected
for C200H-OD212, C200H-OD213, and
C200H-OD21A.
Page 182: C200H-OC226 dimensions added.
corrected and added to.
Page 70: Note on cycling the power supply added to
the procedure.
Page 11, 19. 57, 85, 185: Added C200HW-PA204R.
Page 16: “KB” corrected to “K words” in the table.
Page 18: Addition to first paragraph in 2-2-4 Power
Supply Units. Information on AC input terminals in the
diagram corrected.
Page 19: Added sentence on power consumption
restrictions and tables on CPU Units and Backplanes
for C200HW-PA204R.
Page 41, 86, 188: Added Controller Link Unit and PC
Card Unit.
Page 56: Corrections and additions made to the note
in the diagram.
Page 56, 101/102: Added information on 24-VDC output.
Page xii to xiv: Major changes made to safety
information.
Pages 11, 12, 13, 19, 20, 48, 49, 59, 61, 89, 90, 91,
103, 189, 196, 201: Information related to Power Supply Units and/or Backplanes added/changed.
Page 15: Information on DIP switch pin 5 changed.
Pages 22, 92: Information on Triac Output Units added/changed.
Pages 24, 26, 93, 191: Information related to Group-2
High-density I/O Units added.
Pages 30, 94, 192: Information on Position Control
Units and/or Motion Control Units added.
Page 40: Information on the number of mountable
Master I/O Units added.
Page 47: Minor change to graphic.
Page 62: Power consumption value in first line
changed from 50 to 40.
Page 67: Precautionary information added.
Page 71: One sentence added to information on
power interruptions.
Page 78: Information added to table.
Page 81: Information on Output Units added.
Page 95: Information on Voice Unit added.
Pages 105, 137: Changes made in several places.
Page 106: Information on RUN output added.
Page 107: Changes made to bit addresses.
Page 147: Information on DC Input Units added.
Pages 148, 150, 159, 161, 169, 171: Circuit configuration graphics and information on manufacturing
numbers added.
Pages 149, 151, 162, 170, 171: Notes added.
Page 151: Information on Transistor Output Units
added.
Page 180: Information on B7A Interface Units added.
Page 92: Added CompoBus/S and CompoBus/D Master Units.
Page 101: Separated output capacities and added
specifications for RUN output. Enclosure rating corrected.
Page 123: Graphs corrected.
Page 196: Analog Timer Unit and Group-2 High-density I/O Units dimensions corrected.
Page 12: Note added after table.
Page xiv: Memory Units changed to Memory Cassettes and Power Supply Units added to the precaution item for turning OFF the power supply.
Page 29: I/O number setting changed for two 40-pin
connectors.
Page 77: Power interruption duration changed.
Page 146: Note changed to clarify indicator conditions.
237
Revision History
Revision code
Date
08
February 2003
Revised content
“CompoBus/D” was globally changed to “DeviceNet.”
Page 21: “NC” added to top left illustration.
Pages 25, 27, 98, 119, and 207: “N” added to model numbers and/or model numbers
added.
Page 31: Section 2-3-2 replaced with section on CX-Programmer.
Pages 68, 88, and 91: Note added.
Pages 77 and 86: Information added on Antinoise Insulating Attachment.
Pages 133 to 135: Model numbers added and relay specifications changed. (Index
entries also added for new model numbers.)
09
238
June 2003
The following corrections and changes were made.
Page 113: Voltage at bottom right of table changed to “1,000.”
Page 135: Note added.
Pages 140, 160, 161, 164, 171, 173, 174, 176, 178, 179, 181, 182, 184, and
186: Circuit configurations added for new versions of Units.
Page 167: “At 24 VDC...” removed.
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
1 Commerce Drive
Schaumburg, IL 60173
847.843.7900
For US technical support or
other inquiries: 800.556.6766
OMRON CANADA, INC.
885 Milner Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M1B 5V8
416.286.6465
OMRON ON-LINE
Global - http://www.omron.com
USA - http://www.omron.com/oei
Canada - http://www.omron.ca
W302-E1-09 9/03/100
©2003 OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
Printed in the U.S.A.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
">